BRIVO CT315/325 Functional Check / Adjustment: GE Healthcare

GE Healthcare
BRIVO CT315/325
FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
Operating Documentation
5306509-1EN
Rev 4
© 2009-2012, General Electric Company,
All Rights Reserved.
Advanced Service Documentation Property of GE
For GE Service Personnel Only
No Rights Licensed - Do Not Use or Copy Disclosure to
Third Parties Prohibited
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 4 5306509-1EN
警告 • 本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
(ZH-CN) • 如果维修服务提供商需要非英文版本，客户需自行提供翻译服务。
• 未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
• 忽略本警告可能对维修人员，操作员或患者造成触电、机械伤害或其他形式的
伤害。
• THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

WARNING
• IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE
(EN) OTHER THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO
PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES.
Attention
• DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS
SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
• FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE
SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC
SHOCK, MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.
ATTENTION • Ce manuel de service n'est disponible qu'en anglais.

• Si le technicien du client a besoin de ce manuel dans une autre langue
(FR) que l'anglais, c'est au client qu'il incombe de le faire traduire.
• Ne pas tenter d'intervenir sur les équipements tant que le manuel service
n'a pas été consulté et compris
• Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien,
l'opérateur ou le patient des blessures dues à des dangers électriques,
mécaniques ou autres.
警告 • このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
(JA) • サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業は
その業者の責任で行うものとさせていただきます。
• このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わないで
ください。
• この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あるいは患者さ
んが、感電や機械的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります。
ATENÇÃO • Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

• Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica, que não a gems,
(PT-BR) solicitar estes manuais noutro idioma, é da responsabilidade do cliente
fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado ecompreendido este
manual de assistência técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode por em perigo a segurança do
técnico, operador ou paciente devido a choques elétricos, mecânicos ou
outros.
ATTENTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
ОСТОРОЖНО! • Данное руководство по обслуживанию предлагается только на

английском языке.
(RU) • Если сервисному персоналу клиента необходимо руководство не на
английском, а на каком-то другом языке, клиенту следует
самостоятельно обеспечить перевод.
• Перед обслуживанием оборудования обязательно обратитесь к
данному руководству и поймите изложенные в нем сведения.
• Несоблюдение требований данного предупреждения может привести
к тому, что специалист по обслуживанию, оператор или пациент
получат удар электрическим током, механическую травму или другое
повреждение.
ATENCION • Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.

• Si el encargado de mantenimiento de un cliente necesita un idioma que
(ES) no sea el inglés, el cliente deberá encargarse de la traducción del
manual.
• No se deberá dar servicio técnico al equipo, sin haber consultado y
comprendido este manual de servicio.
• La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor
de servicios, el operador o el paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por
causas eléctricas, mecánicas o de otra naturaleza.
DIKKAT • Bu servis kilavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.

• Eğer müşteri teknisyeni bu kilavuzu ingilizce dişinda bir başka lisandan
(TR) talep ederse, bunu tercüme ettirmek müşteriye düşer.
• Servis kilavuzunu okuyup anlamadan ekipmanlara müdahale etmeyiniz.
• Bu uyariya uyulmamasi, elektrik, mekanik veya diğer tehlikelerden dolayi
teknisyen, operatör veya hastanin yaralanmasina yol açabilir.
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In Shipment” on ALL
copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a GE representative or hospital receiving
agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event,
within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company
will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
To file a report:
Fill out a report on http://egems.med.ge.com/edq/home.jsp
Contact the local service coordinator.
ATTENTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be
performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed
by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall
be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are
highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these products,
GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the
requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party
Attention
service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained should be thoroughly
read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this equipment in operation. The
General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to assist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no practical
design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to take adequate
precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to radiation.
It is important that anyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the
recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports
available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the
International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents, and
representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective materials and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.
LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTIONARY STATEMENTS
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent
type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS

Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service representatives.
GE personnel, please use the GEMS CQA Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this publication.
ATTENTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
Blank
ATTENTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
REVISION HISTORY
REV Date Primary Reason for Change
4 03/09/2012 Table Updated cradle absolute position adjustment.
System Added note for formatting USB to Fat32 in Windows system if applying USB disk.
Updated the software patch installation procedures. (Sec. 2)
Added the software patch uninstallation procedures. (Sec. 2)
Added the step of hardware settings. (Sec.2)
Added the screen illustrations of hardware settings and language setting. (Sec. 2)
Revision History
3 12/07/2010 Warning Added multi-language warnings for French, Japanese, Portuguese-Brazil, Russian, Spanish and Turkish.
System Updated power frequency to 50/602%Hz. (Sec. 1)

Added new alignment JIG uniformity test procedure. (Sec. 3)
Added POR and BOW procedure with new alignment JIG. (Sec. 3)
Updated cradle movement distance for water scan. (Sec. 5)
OC -
Gantry Added new rotation balance adjustment procedure for EMC-Gantry. (Sec. 2)
Updated figure for G.Pulse. (Sec. 2)
Updated HSDCD Slip Ring clean procedure. (Sec. 4)
Updated Positioning Lights adjustment procedure. (Sec. 7)
Updated ‘POSN Light’ button check for Gantry control panel. (Sec. 7)
Table -
DAS -
XG -
REVISION HISTORY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
2 11/06/2009 System Added Denta Scan option and ConnectPro option informations for application software installation. (Sec. 2)
Updated figures for DICOM Camera Configuration and PostScript Camera Configuration. (Sec. 2)
Added TAB information for InSite installation. (Sec. 2)
Added Note(s): “The detector temperature must be at a specified temperature before alignment, otherwise
alignment result is not exact.”. (Sec. 3; Sec. 4; Sec. 5)
added Note(s) for water phantom scan. (Sec. 5)
Updated High Contrast scan lilst. (Sec 5)
Updated Image Performance Check List. (Sec. 6)
OC Updated commands for initializing DVD media. (Sec. 1)
Gantry Updated Illustration for DAS PS DC Output. (Sec. 1)

Deleted Master Gauge tool for receiver position adjustment. (Sec. 2)
Deleted Preparation Step d. “Push the Emergency Redset switch on the TGP board.” for Sec. 3 G. Pulse
Position. (Sec. 2)
Updated figure for G.Pluse position adjustment. (Sec. 2)
Updated Receiver RF Cables to Optical Fiber and Power Cables. (Sec. 2)
Updated signal brush contact check. (Sec. 2)
Added to switch OFF/ON the ‘CB2’ switch for component operation that is controlled by 24V power. (Sec.
2, Sec. 4)
Added to remove the power cable from the MUX for brush board removal. (Sec. 4)
Updated the signal cable connector of brush board from CN1 to J7. (Sec. 4)
Updated the Gantry rotation speed for FAST mode from 0.7 sec to 1.0 sec. (Sec. 4)
Added a step “Switch ON the service switch on the TGP.” for positioning lights adjustment. (Sec. 7)
Table Updated Gantry Display from ‘190’ to ‘0’ for Longitudinal Accuracy.
Updated TGP DS9 LED from ‘Change’ to ‘Data CHG’.
Updated Output Torque Adjustment of Stepping Motor Driver.
DAS Updated Illustration for DAS PS DC Output. (Sec. 2)
XG Updated Max of Active Mean to 750000   1250000 for DAS Count check. (Sec. 1)
Updated dip switch S1 from “T6 switch” to “T5 switch” for kV&mA display mode. (Sec. 2)
1 08/06/2009 Initial release.
REVISION HISTORY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY FUNCTIONAL CHECK/ADJUSTMENT
REV 4 5306509-1EN
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION/NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-1-1 Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-1-2 Operator Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2 TORQUE CONVERSION TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Table of Content
1-2-1 [Conversion: kgf•cm -> N•m] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-2-2 [Conversion: N•m -> kgf•cm] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-2-3 [Conversion: N•m -> lbf•ft] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
SECTION 2 - TORQUE VALUE FOR SCREW TIGHTENING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 NORMAL SCREWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
SECTION 3 - COMMON PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 HOW TO REMOVE GANTRY COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-1-1 Gantry Side Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-1-2 Gantry Top Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-1-3 Gantry Front Cover Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-1-4 Gantry Rear Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-2 INSTALLING GANTRY COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-2-1 Gantry Cover Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-2-2 Gantry Dolly Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-2-3 Gantry Cover Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-3 PDU COVER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-4 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-4-1 Saving System State Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-4-2 Restoring System State Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-4-3 Displaying the SMPTE image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3-4-4 Performing the System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3-4-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed-base System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
TABLE OF CONTENTS i
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
ii TABLE OF CONTENTS
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
BEFORE USING THIS MANUAL

This CT system is especially dangerous because its heavy gantry continuously rotates at a high speed with high
power electric current (380  480 VAC) conducted through its slip rings.
The hazards, although sometimes obvious, need to be recognized since the potential for serious injury or death
exists.
WARNING
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY!!
READ AND THOROUGHLY UNDERSTAND THE ‘PROSPEED SERIES SAFETY GUIDELINES/
EMC’ MANUAL (5116382) BEFORE PERFORMING ANY PROCEDURE IN THIS ‘FUNCTIONAL
CHECK/ADJUSTMENT.’
Use of This Manual

Use this ‘Functional Check/Adjustment’ for the following purposes:
• A during- and post-installation check to ensure that the entire system operates properly.
• As a reference source for Periodic Maintenance which mainly contains abbreviated lists.
• A post-FMI (Field Modification Instruction) check to verify system operation.
• A pre-diagnostic check to verify or determine failure symptoms before or during troubleshooting.
• A post-diagnostic check to verify system operation after repairs, before returning it to the customer to
use.
INTRODUCTION 1-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-1 GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION/NOTICE
1-1-1 Gantry
WARNING
ROTATION AND ELECTROCUTION HAZARDS!
SWITCH OFF THE ‘CB3’ AND ‘XG POWER SWITCHES LOCATED AT PDU BEFORE
INSERTING ANY OBJECT INTO OR WORKING ON THE GANTRY.
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD!
ALWAYS INSERT THE GANTRY AZIMUTH LOCK PIN BEFORE REPLACING THE TUBE, DAS,
DETECTOR, HV TANK, OR OTHER WEIGHTY COMPONENTS.
WARNING
ELECTROCUTION!
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT ON UNSHIELDED TERMINALS. USE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON LIVE EQUIPMENT.
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD!
ANY OF THE FOLLOWINGS WILL INITIATE THE GANTRY ROTATION:
1. POWERING ON THE SYSTEM OR GANTRY.
2. PUSHING THE RESET SWITCH ON THE TGP BOARD.
3. PUSHING THE POSITIONING LIGHT BUTTON.
4. STAND CLEAR OF THE ROTATING GANTRY.
1-2 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-1-2 Operator Console
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD !
IF THE SYSTEM HAS UPS ASSY, MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF THE UPS POWER BEFORE
YOU ACCESS THE OPERATOR CONSOLE.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD!
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST ON EXPOSED SURFACES. USE EXTREME CAUTION
WHEN WORKING ON LIVE EQUIPMENT.
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
CAUTION
Rotating fan assemblies!
Do not place any item into rotating blades. Use extra care when working near fan
assemblies.
NOTICE
Turn OFF power before removing or inserting any board or plug.
INTRODUCTION 1-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-2 TORQUE CONVERSION TABLES

Use the following conversion formula and table to change a unit suitable for a torque wrench you have.
1-2-1[Conversion: kgf•cm -> N•m]

Conversion Formula:
xx (N•m) = xxxx (kgf•cm) x 0.098
Conversion Table:
1 kgf•cm = 0.098 N•m
Coversion: kgf•cm -> N•m
kgf•cm 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
N•m
0 0 0.0981 0.1961 0.2942 0.3923 0.4903 0.5884 0.6865 0.7845 0.8826
10 0.9807 1.0787 1.1768 1.2748 1.3729 1.4710 1.5690 1.6671 1.7652 1.8632
20 1.9613 2.0594 2.1574 2.2555 2.3536 2.4516 2.5497 2.6478 2.7458 2.8439
30 2.9420 3.0400 3.1381 3.2361 3.3342 3.4323 3.5303 3.6284 3.7265 3.8245
40 3.9226 4.0207 4.1187 4.2168 4.3149 4.4129 4.5110 4.6091 4.7071 4.8052
50 4.9033 5.0013 5.0994 5.1974 5.2955 5.3936 5.4916 5.5897 5.6878 5.7858
60 5.8840 5.9820 6.0800 6.1781 6.2762 6.3742 6.4723 6.5704 6.6684 6.7665
70 6.8646 6.9626 7.0607 7.1587 7.2568 7.3549 7.4529 7.5510 7.6491 7.7474
80 7.8452 7.9433 8.0413 8.1394 8.2375 8.3355 8.4336 8.5317 8.6297 8.7278
90 8.8260 8.9239 9.0220 9.1200 9.2181 9.3162 9.4142 9.5123 9.6104 9.7084
100 9.8065
1-4 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-2 TORQUE CONVERSION TABLES (CONTINUED)
1-2-2[Conversion: N•m -> kgf•cm]

Conversion Formula:
xx (kgf•cm) = xxxx (N•m) x 10.2
Conversion Table:
1 N•m = 10.2 kgf•cm
Conversion: N•m -> kgf•cm
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
N•m 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
kgf•cm
0 0 10 20 31 41 51 61 71 82 92
10 102 112 122 133 143 153 163 173 184 194
20 204 214 224 235 245 255 265 275 286 296
30 306 316 326 337 347 357 367 377 388 398
40 408 418 428 439 449 459 469 479 490 500
50 510 520 530 541 551 561 571 581 592 602
60 612 622 632 643 653 663 673 683 694 704
70 714 724 734 745 755 765 775 785 796 806
80 816 826 836 847 857 867 877 887 898 908
90 918 928 938 949 959 969 979 989 1000 1010
100 1020
INTRODUCTION 1-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-2 TORQUE CONVERSION TABLES (CONTINUED)
1-2-3[Conversion: N•m -> lbf•ft]

Conversion Formula:
xx (lbf•ft) = xxxx (N•m) x 0.737
xx (N•m) = xxxx (lbf•ft) x 1.356
Conversion Table:
1 N•m=0.737 lbf•ft
Conversion: N•m -> lbf•ft
N•m 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
lbf•ft
0 0 0.737 1.474 2.211 2.948 3.685 4.422 5.159 5.896 6.633
10 7.370 8.107 8.844 9.581 10.318 11.055 11.792 12.529 13.266 14.003
20 14.740 15.477 16.214 16.951 17.688 18.425 19.162 19.899 20.636 21.373
30 22.110 22.847 23.584 24.321 25.058 25.795 26.532 27.269 28.006 28.743
40 29.480 30.217 30.954 31.691 32.428 33.165 33.902 34.639 35.376 36.113
50 36.850 37.587 38.324 39.061 39.798 40.535 41.272 42.009 42.746 43.483
60 44.220 44.957 45.694 46.431 47.168 47.905 48.642 49.379 50.116 50.853
70 51.590 52.327 53.064 53.801 54.538 55.275 56.012 56.749 57.486 58.223
80 58.960 59.697 60.434 61.171 61.908 62.645 63.382 64.119 64.856 65.593
90 66.330 67.067 67.804 68.541 69.278 70.015 70.752 71.489 72.226 72.963
100 73.700
1-6 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 2 - TORQUE VALUE FOR SCREW TIGHTENING
CAUTION
Use locktite for screws which are installed to the Gantry rotation block. Use stud bolt with
locktite or nylon nut to prevent loosening if a screw is removed in service maintenance.
CAUTION
SECTION 2 - TORQUE VALUE FOR

When you secure stud bolts with locktite, you must keep the screw torque shown in Table
SCREW TIGHTENING
‘Stud Bolt (Steel) with Locktite.’
Do not rotate the Gantry until the locktite hardens. (75 % of maximum strength after 2 hours;
100 % after 16 hours.)
If it is not possible to wait for the time period mentioned above, use nylon nuts.
Table 2-1 Stud Bolt (Steel) with Locktite
Screw Size Torque [kg-cm] (Unless otherwise specified)
M4 10
M5 15
M6 35
M8 70
INTRODUCTION 2-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-1 NORMAL SCREWS

Secure normal screws with the tightening torque shown in the following tables unless otherwise specified.
Table 2-2 Pan Head Screw
Screw Size Torque [kg-cm] (Unless otherwise specified)
Brass Steel (4.8) Stainless

(Combination)
(Screw & Nut) (Screw & Nut) (Screw & Nut)
If screw and nut

are of different
M1 0.17 0.18 0.22
material, use the
weakest torque.
M 1.2 0.32 0.34 0.42
M 1.4 0.49 0.52 0.65
M 1.7 0.90 0.96 1.2
M2 1.5 1.6 1.9
M 2.2 1.9 2.0 2.5
M 2.3 2.3 2.5 3.1
M 2.5 3.0 3.2 4.0
M 2.6 3.4 3.6 4.5
M3 5.3 5.7 7.1
M 3.5 8.2 8.7 11
M4 12 13 16
M 4.5 17.5 19 23.5
M5 24.5 26.5 33
M6 41.5 44 55
M8 101 108 135
2-2 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 3 - COMMON PROCEDURES
3-1 HOW TO REMOVE GANTRY COVERS
3-1-1 Gantry Side Cover Removal

1. Remove the two screw caps and mounting bolts, then lift the cover upward to remove the left side cover.
Illustration 3-1 Side Cover Removal

Mounting Bolt (x2)
Service Window Cover
2. Refer to Step 1 to remove the right side cover.
INTRODUCTION 3-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-1-2 Gantry Top Cover Removal

1. Remove the Gantry left side cover.
2. Switch OFF the ‘CB2’, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
3. Disconnect the fan power cable connector that connected to the gantry rear cover.
4. Unscrew two screws that secure the left top cover.
Illustration 3-2 Top Cover Removal
Top Cover_L
Associated Bracket Plug (x2)

Screw (x2)
5. Hold the cover bracket to horizontally draw the top cover outward to release plugs from the both sides of the
top cover bracket. (See Illustration 3-2)
6. “Crash” is heard when plugs were releaed, hold the cover bracket to lift the top cover upward until it can be
taken out from the mounting bracket.
Illustration 3-3 Top Cover Removal
Mounting Bracket
7. Repeat Step 3 through Step 6 for the right top cover removal.
3-2 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-1-3 Gantry Front Cover Removal

3. Remove the right side cover and top covers from the Gantry.
4. Remove the scan window from the front and rear covers.
Illustration 3-4 Gantry Front and Rear Covers

Right View
Front Cover Rear Cover

Holes for Dolly
Studs Installation
Cover Mounting Bolt (x4)

5. Install the four dolly studs onto the Gantry Front Cover.
6. Install the cover dollies to the dolly studs.
Note
Pay attention to the direction of the cover dollies when removing the front cover.
Illustration 3-5 Cover Dolly Installation
Long Side Toward Table Short Side Toward Gantry

INTRODUCTION 3-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-1-3 Gantry Front Cover Removal (Continued)

7. Unscrew the two Mounting Bolts from the both side of the front cover.
8. Slightly disengage the Gantry Front Cover to release the cover plugs from the gantry frame.
NOTICE
For gantry front/rear cover securing, magnet is attached on the gantry HLA frame, please be
careful to separate the gantry front/rear cover from the gantry HLA and avoid falling down.
Illustration 3-6 Gantry Front Cover Securing

Front Cover
Magnet
9. Disconnect the cable connectors.
• FMPhone RL1 ---- 5321620 (to front cover) & 5321399 (to TGP)
• S-DISP RL1 ---- 5321607 (to front cover) & 5321391 (to TGP)
10. Step by step raise the gantry front cover to the proper position with the cover dollies to move out it from gap
between the gantry and table.
Illustration 3-7 Gantry Front Cover Removal
2 Vertical
1 Horizontal
3-4 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Illustration 3-8 Gantry Front Cover with Cover Dollies

Dolly Stud (x4)

FMPhone RL1 & S-DISP RL1
Plug (x2)
Mounting Bolt Hole (x2)
11. Disconnect two cable connectors from the Front Control Panel (J1 and J2) and remove the Control Panel by
unscrewing its four bolts.
Illustration 3-9 Front Control Panel Removal

Connector_J2 Connector_J1
Bolt (x4)
S-DISP Dummy
INTRODUCTION 3-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

12. Hang the Front Control Panel on the panel support pole of the Gantry.
13. Plug the S-DISP Dummy (5329766) to the Front Control Panel J2.
14. Connect the cable connector (5321391) from the TGP to the Front Control Panel J1 for its service position.
Illustration 3-10 Place Control Panel

J2
J1
Support Pole Front Control Panel Cable (From TGP to Control Panel)
3-6 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Gantry Front Cover Removal for a Small Room

Note
Use this method when width of the room is less than 2885 mm.
2. Switch OFF the OC power and the ‘CB2’, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
3. Move the cradle to the OUT limit position.
4. Cover the cradle with a cloth on the to prevent the front cover from scratches or damage.

Illustration 3-11 Cover the Cradle with Cloth
Cloth
5. Remove the right side and both top covers.

6. Remove the scan window from the front and rear covers.
7. Disconnect the Control Panel and Microphone cable connectors from the TGP board.
8. Switch ON the ‘CB2’ switch.
9. Rotate the Gantry manually so that the X-ray tube is set to 6 o’clock position.
INTRODUCTION 3-7
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

10. Unscrew the two cover mounting bolts.
11. Lift up the front cover, then contact the cover to the edge of the cradle and rotate it toward the cradle so that it
stays on the cradle.
NOTICE
Take care not to damage any Gantry Parts (especially the positioning light) when rotating
the front cover toward the cradle.
Illustration 3-12 Gantry Front Cover Removal for Small Room
3
Rotate
Vertical
2
Horizontal
3-8 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-1-4 Gantry Rear Cover Removal

Refer to the Gantry Front Cover removal process for the Rear Cover.
1. Install the gantry cover dollies to the gantry rear cover.
2. Unscrew the two Rear Cover Mounting Bolts.
3. Slightly disengage the Gantry Rear Cover and disconnect the cable connectors.
• RMPhone RL1 ---- 5321619 (to rear cover) & 5321398 (to TGP)
• X-DISP RL1 ---- 5321618 (to rear cover) & 5321395 (to TGP)
• Fan RL3 ---- 5321537
4. Remove the Rear Cover away from the Gantry.

3-2 INSTALLING GANTRY COVERS
3-2-1 Gantry Cover Notice

When installing the Gantry covers, verify that the azimuth locking pin should be disengaged.
NOTICE
When installing the Gantry front cover, first cover the front edge of the cradle with a cloth to
prevent the front cover from scratches or damage.
3-2-2 Gantry Dolly Caution
CAUTION
If the dollies fall over , they can injure persons. Therefore, after using the dollies, keep them
in a safe place and/or secure them from falling over even when the customer or other per-
sons accidentally hit the dollies.
INTRODUCTION 3-9
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-2-3 Gantry Cover Adjustment
Front/Rear Cover adjustment

During the Front/Rear Cover installation, assure the position of the Front/Rear and enough gap between the Gantry
Cover and the rotating subsystem, so need to adjust the Gantry Front/Rear Cover position as below steps.
• Rotate the Gantry manually until the tube reaches the 1 o’clock, 3 o’clock, 9 o’clock and 12 o’clock
position, respectively measure the distance between the Support edge on the Gantry Front/Rear Cover
and the aperture of collimator with ruler. (See Illustration 3-13)
Illustration 3-13 Measure the distance between the aperture and the support
Tube
Aperture
Support
the Gantry
Rear Cover
3-10 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-2-3 Gantry Cover Adjustment (Continued)

• Compare the distances, if the difference is more than 5mm, remove the Front/Rear Cover from the Gan-
try, loose the adjuster bolts (marked in Illustration 3-14) and adjust the Front/Rear Cover. Then install
the Front/Rear Cover onto the Gantry again.
Illustration 3-14 Adjust the Front Cover
Adjuster Bolt (x6)

• Repeat above steps to assure that the distances difference is within 5mm.
INTRODUCTION 3-11
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-2-3 Gantry Cover Adjustment (Continued)
Side Cover Adjustment

If the gap between the Side Cover and the Top cover is too big, adjust the Side Cover in the vertical position.
• Loose the mounting bolts on the Side Cover to adjust the Side Cover vertically. (See Illustration 3-15)
Illustration 3-15 Side Cover Adjustment
Adjuster Bolt (x8)
3-12 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-3 PDU COVER REMOVAL

1. Verify that the main breaker of the Power Distribution Box should be OFF.
2. Remove the front cover by unscrewing its screws.
Illustration 3-16 Removing the PDU Covers
INTRODUCTION 3-13
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-4 BASIC OPERATION
3-4-1 Saving System State Data

The basic system data (System State data) must be saved in advance in case the System Hard Disk Drive in the
OC is broken.
Note
The following will be saved as a system state data.
- Option key information
- Log files (log for success/failure when saving/restoring software sets)
- Scan protocol files
- IOS preferences
- Calibration files
- Autovoice files
- Next patient exam number
- User preferences
- InSite information
- Tube usage information
- Crosstalk A, B channel data (for dual slice system)
- TnT Definition File log (for dual slice system)
- Q cal channel ratio (for dual slice system)
Preparation
• One DVD-RAM or USB disk
Procedures (Method I)
1. Verify that the system is powered ON. If it is not, switch ON the main switch of the OC. The system is started
up, then the main screen appears.
2. Insert the DVD-RAM into the DVD drive or plus USB disk to PC.
3. Click on Service menu Uilities.
4. Select Save System State.
5. “Do you want to save system state?” appears, click on Yes.
6. “Please choose the storage device for saving system state!” appears, click on DVD or USB to continue.
7. “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” appears. Click on Continue.
Note
At this time, you can cancel system state data saving procedure. If ‘Continue’ is selected, this pro-
cedure can NOT be canceled.
8. “Warning: Saving system state will erase the previous contents” appears. Click on Okay.
9. “System state saved successfully” appears. Click on Okay.
3-14 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-4-1 Saving System State Data (Continued)
Procedures (Method II)

1. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select Utilities -> Shutdown -> Application
Shutdown.
2. Click on Savestate.
3. “Do you want to save system state?” pops up. Click on Yes.
4. Insert the DVD-RAM into the DVD-RAM drive or plus the USB disk to Host PC.
5. “Please choose storage device for saving system state” appears, select DVD or USB to saving system state.
“This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” appears. Click on Continue.

6.
Note
At this time, you can cancel system-state-data saving procedure. If ‘Continue‘ is selected, this
procedure can NOT be canceled.
7. ‘Warning: Saving System state will erase the previous contents.‘ appears. Click on Okay.
8. ‘System state saved successfully‘ appears. Click on Continue.
3-4-2 Restoring System State Data
Procedures
1. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select Utilities -> Shutdown -> Application
Shutdown.
2. Click on Restorestate.
3. ‘Insert DVD and press confirm.‘ appears. Click on Continue.
4. Insert the DVD-RAM, including the system state data saved in section 3-4-1, into the DVD-RAM drive.
5. ‘This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.‘ appears. Click on Continue.
Note
At this time, you can cancel system-state-data reloading procedure. If ‘Continue‘ is selected, this
procedure can NOT be canceled.
6. ‘Warning: Restoring will erase the previous contents on disk.‘ appears. Click on Continue.
7. ‘System state restored successfully‘ appears. Click on Continue.
8. To remove the DVD-RAM from the DVD-RAM drive, press the Eject button on the DVD-RAM drive.
9. Select Startup to return to the scan panel screen.
INTRODUCTION 3-15
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-4-3 Displaying the SMPTE image

1. Select Service  Install SMPTE image (To install the SMPTE image on the system.)
2. Click on ImageWorks Browser to display the examination list.
3. Select ‘SMPTE‘ image in the Examination list.
4. Click on Viewer to display the SMPTE pattern.
5. Enlarge the SMPTE image to full screen display, using Format  Full screen format.
If necessary, drag the Zoom slider to display the pattern to the full screen.
3-16 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-4-4 Performing the System Configuration

1. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select Utilities  Shutdown  Application
Shutdown.
2. On the desktop menu, click on Reconfig button located on the upper right of the screen.
This System configuration menu appears.
Using this screen, perform configuration.
NOTICE
The characters of alphanumerics, underscore, and period ONLY can be used. Other
characters are rejected to input even if they are input.
3. Click on Accept after completing the configuration.

The system shuts down, then starts up automatically.
INTRODUCTION 3-17
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-4-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed-base System

The following tables shows the hierarchical menu (buttons) to install the Option software.
Buttons to be selected
Service Menu Option Installation Main Window Selection Window I Selection Window II
DVD
Permanent Manual
Install Quit
Install Options Flex Trial
Quit
Remove
Quit
1. Click on Service icon to display the Service desktop Menu , then select Utilities -> Shutdown -> Application
Shutdown.
2. On the desktop menu, click on Install Options button located on the upper right of the screen.
3-18 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-4-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed-base System (Continued)

The ‘CT Software Options‘ screen appears.

3. Click on Install.
Note
If you click on an option in the list, the option is highlighted and “Install“ button is disabled. In this
case, enter the cursor in the option screen, then click on the right button of the mouse to enable the
“Install“ button.
INTRODUCTION 3-19
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-4-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed-base System(Continued)

4. Select either Permanent or Flex Trial.
• Permanent: selected when a customer purchased the option formally.
• Flex Trial: selected when a customer uses the option within a fixed time period as a trial. (The message
that notices the expiration date will be displayed over 10 days before the expiration of a Flex Trial.)
3-4-5-1 When ‘Permanent’ is selected

1. Select either DVD or Manual.
• DVD: selected when the Option key DVD is used at installation.
• Manual: selected when the licence string is used at installation. The licence string is a unique number
with 25 characters that you get from your OLC.
3-20 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

2. When DVD is selected:
The following screen apears. Insert the option key DVD into the DVD drive, then click on OK.

The “CT Software Options” screen appears.
INTRODUCTION 3-21
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

a. Select the Option to be installed from the “Available Options” table.
Note
You can select several options from the list, while pressing the shift key.
b. Click on Install.
The option loading is started, then the message window appears after completion. The option(s) is dis-
played in the “Installed Options” table.
Note
Just after clicking on Install, the setup window might be displayed, depending on the option to be
installed. In this case, a proper entry/selection must be performed. Refer to Option setup window
described in this section.
c. Click on OK.
d. Click on Quit.
e. Eject the option DVD from the DVD drive.
f. When other option(s) is installed, repeat all steps above.
3. When Manual is selected:
The following screen appears.

a. Enter the licence string in the box, then click on Accept. The licence string is an unique number with 25
characters that you get from your OLC.
Note
Just after clicking on Accept, the setup window might be displayed, depending on the option to be
3-22 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

b. The option loading is started, then the following window appears.
Click on OK.

c. The “CT Software Options” screen appears.
Verify that the option to be installed is displayed in the list as a ‘permanent’ mode.
INTRODUCTION 3-23
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

d. When other option(s) is installed, repeat all steps above.
e. Click on Quit.
4. Click on shutdown icon in desktop menu. The system is rebooted.
6. Perform Section 3-5-1, Saving System State Data for backup.
3-4-5-2 When ‘Flex Trial’ is selected

1. Enter the licence string in the box. The licence string is an unique number with 25 characters that you get from
your OLC.
2. Click on Accept.
Note
Just after clicking on Accept, the setup window might be displayed, depending on the option to be
3. The option loading is started, then the following window appears.
Click on OK.
3-24 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

4. The “CT Software Options” screen appears.
Verify that the option to be installed is displayed in the list as a ‘Flex Trial’ mode.

Note
‘Days left’ means the remaining days when a customer can use the option as a trial. This number
counts down day by day, then the option will disappear from the option list when ‘Days left’ becomes
0.
When the flex–trial option has expired and the [New Patient] button is clicked, the Option Status Log
window appears so that a customer can know the expired flex–trial option.
5. When other option(s) is installed, repeat all steps above.
6. Click on Quit.
7. Click on shutdown icon in desktop menu. The system is rebooted.
9. Perform Section 3-4-1, Saving System State Data for backup.
INTRODUCTION 3-25
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

Option Setup Windows
• Asymmetric Option (Only applied to Brivo CT325):
Select the Asymmetric mode, then click on Accept.
Asymmetric Mode Meanings

10:1 Provides 10 mm and 1 mm slices.
Then after setting the Asymmetric mode, perform the following in this order.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
The following BOW is performed only to warm up the X-ray tube. So, do NOT adjust the De-
tector position even if the results go out of tolerance.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
• BOW
Perform Service –> Calibration –> Automated Alignment –> BOW –> OK –> Confirm.
• Q–cal Channel Ratio:
Perform Service –> Calibration –> Automated Alignment –> Qcal Channel Ratio –>OK –> Confirm.
• Calibration:
Perform Service –> Calibration –> Service Calibration –> Asymmetric Seq.
• CT # Adjustment:
Perform Service –> Calibration –> CT # Adjustment.
3-26 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

• Denta Option:
1.Power ON a camera connected to the CT system.
2.“The procedure will send 1 or 2 films to the camera ...” message appears. Enter y
3.“Please select a printer in the list....” message appears. Select a proper printer.
4.Since a printer ejects a calibration film, measure distance (mm) printed in a film. (See the Note below.)
5.“Enter the distance Dist 1 in (mm).” message appears. Enter distance (mm) recorded in previous step.(Seethe
Note below.)
6.Click on Quit –> OK.

Note
Entry must be integer and performed in unit of mm.

Round off the first decimal place to the integer. If you have only a ruler with inch unit, convert inch
value to mm value using a formula of “xx inch x 25.4 = yy mm” .
INTRODUCTION 3-27
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

• ConnectPro Option:
The ConnectPro setup window appears. Enter the parameters, then click on Accept.
3-28 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

For a hospital with PPS sever ONLY:
Next, the PPS Server setup window appears. Enter the parameters, then click on Accept.
INTRODUCTION 3-29
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
3-30 INTRODUCTION
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - CHECKS DURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 PRIOR TO INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-3 TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-4 POWER LINE VOLTAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Table of Content
1-5 GANTRY ROTATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-6 EMERGENCY OFF TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-7 X-RAY TUBE OVERHEAT SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-8 SCAN TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
SECTION 2 - SOFTWARE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2 PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 SAVING PATIENT DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-4 SAVING SYSTEM STATE DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-5 SAVING OPTION INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-6 SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-7 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE (CORE OS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-8 INSTALLING APPLICATION SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-9 INSTALLING REVISION-UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-9-1 Loading Revision-up Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-9-2 Patch Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-10 UNINSTALLING REVISION-UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2-10-1 Patch Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2-11 RESTORING THE SYSTEM STATE DATA AGAIN! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2-12 CHANGING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (RECONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-12-1 Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-12-2 Completing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2-13 OPTION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2-14 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM NOW! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2-15 CAMERA CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2-16 COMPLETING THE LFC PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2-16-1 Restoring Patient Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2-16-2 Test Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2-17 INSITE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2-17-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2-17-2 Installing InSite Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2-17-3 Setting up InSite Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
2-17-4 Completing the insite installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2-17-5 Saving InSite Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
i
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
2-18 DICOM PRINT TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2-19 AUTOFILM SETTING FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
SECTION 3 - X-RAY ALIGNMENT FOR BRIVO CT315 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2 JIG UNIFORMITY TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3 PLANE OF ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-3-1 Polaroid Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-3-2 Alignment JIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3-4 DETECTOR BEAM-ON-WINDOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-4-1 Polaroid Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-4-2 Alignment JIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-5 GRAVITY SAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3-6 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-7 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3-8 RADIAL ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
SECTION 4 - X-RAY ALIGNMENT FOR BRIVO CT325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-2 DETECTOR POSITION ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-3 APERTURE POSITION ALIGNMENT (ONLY FOR BRIVO CT325) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-4 PLANE OF ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-5 DETECTOR BEAM-ON-WINDOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-6 QCAL CHANNEL RATIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-7 GRAVITY SAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-8 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-9 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-10 RADIAL ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
SECTION 5 - SYSTEM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-2 HILIGHT CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-2-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-2-2 Q Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-2-3 AV Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-2-4 DG Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-3 SPECTRAL CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-4 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
SECTION 6 - IMAGE PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
ii
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 7 - SYSTEM LEVEL SAFETY TESTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7-1 PATIENT TOUCH LEAKAGE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-1-1 Personnel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-1-2 Tools and Test Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-1-3 Required Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-1-4 Test Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-1-5 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-1-5-1 Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-1-5-2 Leakage Current Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-2 CT SYSTEM CHASSIS LEAKAGE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-2-1 Personnel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Table of Content
7-2-2 Action List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-2-3 Tools and Test Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-2-4 Required Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-2-5 PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-2-5-1 Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-2-5-2 Electrical Connection Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-2-5-3 System Ground Wire Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-2-5-4 System Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7-2-5-5 System Power-Up and Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
iii
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
iv
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 1 - CHECKS DURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1-1 GENERAL
WARNING
SECTION 1 - CHECKS DURING

SYSTEM INSTALLATION
This ‘Checks during System Installation’ is performed during the following:
System Installation
Periodic Maintenance.
For System Installation, it is required that all wiring and cabling are complete and equipment is installed.
Proceed to Section 1-2 ‘Checks prior to Applying Power’ and Section 1-3 ‘Temperature,’ ... , in the section order.
SYSTEM 1-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-2 PRIOR TO INSPECTION
CAUTION
Leave all power to the system OFF and tagged until power is called for in specific steps.
Verify the following:

a. Gantry Azimuth Lock Pin is pulled out.
b. All of the following breakers and switches are OFF.
• Breaker on Power Distribution Box (hospital supply)
• Breaker (CB1) on the PDU
CB1
• Service switch (SW1) on the TGP Board on the Gantry.
RESET
TEST1
TEST2
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

SVON SYS JOG FAST
OFF
SVOFF MNL CNT SLOW
c. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.
1-2 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-3 TEMPERATURE
During the installation and start-up of the system you must take continuous temperature checks to make sure the
environment meets specifications listed in Section 3 of the Preinstallation manual. Excessive temperature, coupled
with reduced air flow from clogged filters, may overstress components and cause failures.
Filters
Check and clean all electronic equipment dust filters. GE recommends initially doing this on a weekly basis,
because new installations always have dust and dirt present at this stage. Over a period of time, you may increase
the maintenance interval as site environment improves.
Specifications

SYSTEM INSTALLATION
During installation, use the temperature/humidity recorder and a thermometer to record the temperature and relative
humidity in the scan room. Make sure the data you collect meets the following temperature and humidity
specifications.
• Gantry / Scan Room
- Temperature: 20 C  28 C (at least 5 C/hr gradient)
- Relative Humidity: 30  70 % RH (Non Condensing)
• Operator’s Control / Equipment Room
- -Temperature: 15 C  30 C (at least 5 C/hr gradient)
- -Relative Humidity: 20  80 % RH (Non Condensing)
Action
Contact the air conditioning supplier or your local GE service department when your data fails to meet any
specifications.
SYSTEM 1-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-4 POWER LINE VOLTAGE

The following assumes that the power source for the system was checked for mean voltage, as well as any line
voltage disturbance during preinstallation site checks.
Instrument
Use the same instrument (Dranetz, etc.) to monitor line voltage during this check that you used during the
preinstallation check. The recommended line analyzer is the Power Monitor (3 channel) with the 101 frequency
option, or Dranetz Model line monitor plug in modules. You can use a similar analyzer, as long as it can monitor and
report mean voltage, surges, sags, short term impulses, and frequency drift.
Check Using an Instrument
Monitor the input power lines (380 VAC) to the PDU at the Power Distribution Box (on terminals L1, L2, L3 and N
line) (hospital supply). Check in particular:
• Verify that the current line voltage equals the voltage measured during the preinstallation check.
• Verify that mean line voltage does not fall outside of equipment specifications during the day to day
operation of other site equipment during the installation period.
• Look for any line voltage disturbances and check for a correlation between disturbances and system
malfunctions such as “Aborts” or component failures.
From the printouts, ensure that the power supply meets the following criteria:
• Line Voltage : 380 VAC
(50/60 Hz) (Normal Steady State)
• Daily Voltage Variation : +10% to -5% from nominal steady state (50/60 Hz)
• Frequency : 50/60 Hz ± 2% Hz
Check Using an Oscilloscope

Monitor the power lines with an oscilloscope and verify that no significant distortion, noise or transients exist. Switch
between the oscilloscope’s long and short time base to monitor for spikes, as well as line drift over time. Generally,
harmonics of the third, seventh, and eleventh derivative will be the most prevalent.
Action
Investigate any condition that falls out of spec. Identify the problem source(s) and resolve the problem.
1-4 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-5 GANTRY ROTATION CHECK
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD! BECAUSE OF THE CONTINUOUS ROTATION OF THE GANTRY
THERE ARE HAZARDS INVOLVED IN WORKING ON OR NEAR THE GANTRY. THE MOST
OBVIOUS HAZARD IS THE AXIAL MOTION OF THE GANTRY. THE HIGH VOLTAGE (HV)
SUBSYSTEM IS MOUNTED DIRECTLY ONTO THE GANTRY. THE HV SUBSYSTEM
CONSISTS OF COMPONENTS THAT ARE BULKY AND HEAVY. GIVE ROTATION HAZARDS
RESPECT.

SYSTEM INSTALLATION
3. Remove the rest covers from the Gantry.
4. Switch ON the ‘CB2’ switch at the PDU.
5. Rotate the Gantry manually to verify that nothing interferes the Gantry during rotation (cables, etc.).
6. Switch ON the ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
7. Switch OFF the ’Power’ switch on the Host.
8. Switch ON the ’Power’ switch on the Host.
9. Verify that the Gantry starts to rotate, and it stops at the home position (x-ray tube at 12 o’clock position) before
making two revolutions.
10. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.
SYSTEM 1-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-6 EMERGENCY OFF TEST

After this test, press the reset button on the OC to resume the system.
1. Power ON the system.
2. Move the cradle IN from its home position.
3. Press one of the emergency stop buttons on the Gantry front control and display panel.
Illustration 1-1 Emergency Stop Buttons on the Gantry Front Panel

Gantry Front Control and Display Panel
Emergency Stop Button (x2)

4. Verify that power is removed from the Gantry and Table. Verify the following:
a. LEDs on the TGP board are extinguished.
b. Gantry display panel is extinguished.
5. Press one of the cradle drive buttons, to verify the emergency stop disables the cradle drive.
6. Move the cradle to the home position by hand, to verify the emergency stop released the cradle clutch.
7. Make sure the cradle latches securely in the home position.
8. Using a pencil, press the emergency stop reset switch on the SCB (see Illustration 1-2). Make sure the cradle
drive now work.
Illustration 1-2 Location of Emergency Stop Reset Switch
Emergency Stop Button
Emergency Stop Reset Switch

9. Repeat steps 1. through 8. using the other Gantry emergency stop button on the Gantry front panel.
10. Repeat steps 1. through 8. using the OC emergency stop button.
11. OC Emergency OFF test:
1-6 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-6 EMERGENCY OFF TEST (CONTINUED)

a. Perform the scan using the following parameters:
1.0, 1.5, or 2.0 sec /120 kV/10 mm thickness/160 mA
b. During scanning, press the OC Emergency stop switch.
c. Verify that:
• Immediately X-ray exposure stops.
• The Gantry stops to rotate within two revolutions.
12. Remove the Gantry left and right side covers, then repeat steps 1. through 8. using the Gantry emergency stop
switches on its frame (two).

SYSTEM INSTALLATION
SYSTEM 1-7
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-7 X-RAY TUBE OVERHEAT SAFETY

Check the overheat detection function by performing the following:
1. Remove the service window from the Gantry left side cover.
2. Switch OFF the ‘CB2’, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU. (The other switches should be set to ON)
3. Remove the gantry right cover.
4. Disconnect the rotor connector. (See Illustration 1-3)
If the connector is not accessible, perform the following:
• Switch ON the ‘CB2’ switch.
• Rotate the Gantry manually to the home position (x-ray tube at the 12 o’clock position).
5. Switch ON the ’CB2’, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.
6. Try to perform a scan.
Verify that a scan can not be performed and that the error message is reported on the monitor status screen.
7. Switch OFF the ‘CB2’, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.
8. Reconnect the connector.
Illustration 1-3 Rotor Cable Connector at X-ray Tube
Rotor Connector (Brown)
1-8 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-8 SCAN TEST

This ’Scan Test’ procedure assumes that all the subsystems (Operator Console, Gantry, Table, DAS/Detector, and
X-ray generator) are functioning normally.
In this procedure refer to the Operator manual for detailed information.
Warm Up Scan
1. Make sure that nothing is in the scan area in the Gantry room.
2. Click on the ‘Tube Warm up’ icon to start the x-ray tube warm-up program.
3. Press the blinking [Start Scan] button on the OC keyboard to start the warm-up scan.

It will take approx. 1.5 minutes to complete scans.
SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Make sure that all warm up scans complete without error.
4. Click on [OK] button to return to the initial screen.
Scoutview Scan
5. Perform a series of scout scans to check scout scan operations:
a. Try to perform a scout scan. (Any scan parameters can be set.)
b. Lay the water part of QA phantom horizontally on the cradle.
Perform an AP (0) scout scan on the phantom.
Verify that the phantom diameter (In-Out direction) on the image is 214 mm 3 mm.
c. Set the QA phantom on the phantom holder.
Perform an LT (90) scout scan on the phantom.
d. Use the [External landmark] button on the Gantry control panel to perform the phantom positioning so that
positioning light and center of the phantom are aligned.
e. Select [Suspension] for Autovoice.
f. Press the [External landmark] button and verify that:
• The cradle can NOT be moved.
• The cradle position is the same value as the external landmark.
g. Click on Confirm, then verify that the [Move to Scan] button blinks.
h. Press the [Move to Scan] button, then press the [Stop Move] button before the cradle reaches the set
position. Verify that the cradle stops moving and the [Move to Scan] button blinks again.
i. Press the [Move to Scan] button and move the cradle to the set position. Verify that the [Start Scan] button
blinks.
j. Perform the scan and verify that the scan can complete with no error.
SYSTEM 1-9
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-8 SCAN TEST (CONTINUED)
Axial Scan Sequence

6. Perform a series of axial scans to check axial scan operations:
a. Set the QA phantom on the phantom holder.
b. Use the [External landmark] button on the Gantry control panel to perform the phantom positioning so that
positioning light and center of the phantom are aligned.
c. Select [Inspiration] for Autovoice.
d. Use the following scan parameters: (Other parameters can be set to any value.)
Thickness: :10 mm
kV :120 kV
mA :150 mA
Interval :10 mm
Scan time :3 sec
Position :Feet First
e. Click on Confirm, then verify that the [Start Scan] button blinks.
f. Press the [Start Scan] button and verify that:
• You can hear and understand auto voice for scan start.
• The scan starts.
• Both X-ray ON indicators on the Scan Control Box and Gantry panel is lit and X-ray ON alarm starts to
sound.
g. Press the [Pause] button during scanning and verify that:
• The scan stops at next ISD and the [Confirm] button is changed to the [Resume] button.
• You can hear and understand auto voice for scan end.
h. Click on Resume, then verify that the [Start Scan] button blinks again.
i. Press the [Start Scan] again to continue scanning.
j. Press the [Stop Scan] button and verify that:
• The scan stops IMMEDIATELY and the [Confirm] button is changed to the [Resume] button.
• Both X-ray ON indicators on the Scan Control Box and Gantry panel is OFF and X-ray ON alarm stops
to sound.
• You can hear and understand auto voice for scan end.
k. Click on End Exam and verify that the rotation of the Gantry and rotor in the X-ray tube stops to rotate.
1-10 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-8 SCAN TEST (CONTINUED)
Axial Scan
7. Perform a series of axial scans to check axial scan operations:
a. Set the QA phantom on the phantom holder.
b. Use the following scan parameters: (Other parameters can be set to any value.)
Acquisition No. 1 2 3 4 5
Scan Time [sec] 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0

SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Thickness :10 mm
kV :120 kV
mA :150 mA
Interval :10 mm
Position :Feet First
No. of Images :2
c. Verify that each scan completes with no error.
SYSTEM 1-11
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
1-12 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 2 - SOFTWARE LOADING
2-1 GENERAL
This ‘Software Loading’ describes the Load-From-Cold (LFC) procedure for a full system software loading (OS +
application) procedure (Load-From-Cold : LFC) to the system hard disk.

CAUTION
Make sure that all Images have been reconstructed and archived on the DVD-RAM before
performing this procedure (Refer to the Operator Manual). This procedure will re-initialize
all system data disk, erasing all images and scan data.
SYSTEM 2-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-1 GENERAL (CONTINUED)

LFC procedures are outlined in Illustration 2-1.
NOTICE
If system version is returned to old version, the LFC procedure MUST be used.
Illustration 2-1 Software Loading Standard Procedure
Item LFC Procedures Prerequisite
1 Saving Patient Data Two blank DVD-RAMs/USB Disk
2 Saving System State Data A blank DVD-RAM/USB disk
3 Saving Option Information -
4 Shutdown the System -
Installing the System Software (OS)

5 DVD-ROM(s): Core OS
* Disk Partitioning and OS Installation
6 Installing the Application Software DVD-ROM(s): Application Software
Installing the Revision-up (Patch) software
7 Loading Revision-up (Patch) software DVD-ROM: Patch Software
Patch Verification -
DVD-RAM/USB Disk in which the system

8 Restoring the System State Data again
state data has been saved.
9 Changing System Configuration (Reconfig) -
Option Check
10
Patch Verification
11 Starting Up the System Now -
Completing the LFC Procedures
DVD-RAM/USB Disk in which the images

Restoring Patient Data
12 or raw data have been saved.
Setting Gamma Value -
Test Scan -
13 Installing the InSite Software DVD-ROM: Service Software
2-2 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-2 PREPARATION
Prepare the followings before starting the LFC procedure.
• DVD-ROMs: Core OS
• DVD-ROMs: Application Software
• DVD-ROMs: Service Software (for InSite software, if required)
• Option DVD-RAM (if new options are installed)
• 2 DVD-RAMs/USB Disk (Must be prepared by FE)

- For Saving System State Data (one DVD-RAM or USB Disk)
- For Saving Raw Data (another DVD-RAM or USB Disk)
Note
For the DVD-RAMs to save system state data or patient images, they do NOT need to be manually
formatted. (A used DVD-RAM is available.) This means that the format procedures will be auto-
matically started before saving data.
For applying USB disk, please format USB disk to Fat32 in Windows system.
2-3 SAVING PATIENT DATA
CAUTION
Make sure that all Images and raw data have been reconstructed and archived on the DVD-
RAM/USB Disk before performing this procedure (Refer to the Operator Manual). LFC
procedures will re-initialize all system data disk, erasing all images and scan data.
Prerequisite
• Two blank DVD-RAMs/USB Disk
Note
Patient Image data and Raw data MUST be saved on the different DVD-RAMs/USB Disk.
Procedures
1. If required, save the Patient image on a DVD-RAM/USB Disk. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Works
 CD/DVD)
2. If required, save the raw data on another DVD-RAM/USB Disk. Refer to the Operator manual. (Scan 
Scanner Utilities  Rawdata Function  Device Selection  DVD  Function Selection  Save to De-
vice  Rawdata Selection (e.g. Whole exam)  Start Save)
SYSTEM 2-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-4 SAVING SYSTEM STATE DATA
Prerequisite
• One blank DVD-RAM/USB disk
Manpower Requirements
• Approx. 10 minutes
Procedures
Before beginning the software install, save the system state data.
1. Verify that the system is powered ON.
2. Insert the DVD-RAM into DVD-RAM Drive or plus USB disk to PC.
3. Select Service  Utilities  Savestate.
4. “Do you want to save system state?” appear. Click on Yes.
5. “Please choose the storage device for saving system state!” appear. Click on DVD or USB to continue.
6. Click on Continue.
Note
At this time, you can cancel system state data saving procedure. If ‘Continue’ is selected, this pro-
cedure can NOT be canceled.
7. Warning message “Warning: Saving system state will erase the previous contents” appear. Click on Okay.
8. “System state saved successfully” appears. Click on Okay.
Note
The following will be saved as a system state data.
- Option key information
- Log files (log for success/failure when saving/restoring software sets)
- Scan protocol files
- IOS preferences
- Calibration files
- Autovoice files
- Next patient exam number 
- User preferences
- InSite information
- Tube usage information
- Crosstalk A, B channel data
- TnT Definition File log
- Q cal channel ratio
9. Eject the DVD-RAM from the DVD-RAM drive or unplug USB disk from PC.
2-4 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-5 SAVING OPTION INFORMATION

The option information are normally saved in the system state data. However, they must be written down in the
following table as a back-up. This table can be used when option data reloading fails.
1. On the desktop menu, click on List Option button located on the upper right of the screen.
Option list will appear.
2. Write down the current “Installed option”.
Option Installed? Option Installed? Option Installed?

Volume Analysis II Fast Scan 1.0 sec Advanced Vessel Anal-
ysis
Smart Prep 60 sec Helical Volume Rendering
Package
Smart Recon 90 sec Helical Volume Viewer Pack-
age
DentaScan 120 sec Helical Thickness 0.6mm
Navigator Funcional Analysis Asymmetric Scan
Package
CTPerfusion II Vessel Analysis Pack- CTC
age
Volume Rendering II
Note: Depending on the system version, unavailable option might be included in the option list above cell.
3. Click on Quit to return to the desktop menu.
SYSTEM 2-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-5 SAVING OPTION INFORMATION (CONTINUED)

4. For Asymmetric Option Only:
When a system contains Asymmetric Scan Option, the asymmetric mode must be recorded.
a. Click on Reconfig –> Preferences.
b. Click on Configuration of the Asymmetric scan.
c. Write down the asymmetric mode (10:1, 10:2, or 6:1), then click Quit –> Quit to return to the desktop menu.
2-6 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-5 SAVING OPTION INFORMATION (CONTINUED)

5. For ConnectPro Option Only:
When a system contains ConnectPro Option, the setting parameters must be recorded.
a. Click on shell.
b. Enter the following commands to display the ConnectPro information, then write down them to the table
below.
cat /usr/g/config/WLSystem.cfg

AE_Title HIS Server AE Title
IP_Address HIS Server IP Address
Port_Number HIS Server AE Port #
cat /usr/g/config/WLdcm.cfg
bi_apptitle CT Server AE Title
cat /usr/g/ctuser/app-defaults/network/ppsServer.map
AppTitle PPS Server AE Title
IPAddress PPS Server IP Address
IPPortNo PPS Server AE Port #

c. Enter Exit to return to the desktop menu.
2-6 SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM

1. Click on Shutdown on the desktop menu.
2. Few seconds later, the message “System halted” appears.
3. Press the Power button on Front of OC to power off, or press Hot Key combination Ctrl+ALT+Del to restart
immediately.
SYSTEM 2-7
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-7 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE (CORE OS)
Prerequisite
• DVD-ROMs: Core OS (OS)
Procedures
1. Insert the DVD-ROM (Core OS system software) into the DVD drive of the Host Computer.
2. Verify that the LED of the DVD drive is ON, then OFF again.
3. System will be booted by the DVD-ROM and OS installation will begin.
4. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:
boot: GEHC <Enter> (For English Keyboard only)
iGEHC <Enter> (For International Command only)
Note
The Console Operating System load takes approximately 15 minutes. If the boot: prompt does not
appear, then either the DVD-ROM is bad or the Console Operating System DVD is not installed in
the drive. Typing GEHC will result in both scan and display being on one monitor and require a LFC.
5. After the OS is loaded, a red button appears and displays Reboot.
6. Remove the OS disk, when it ejects.
7. Press Enter to reboot.
8. The Host Computer reboots.
2-8 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-8 INSTALLING APPLICATION SOFTWARE

Note
For installing the application revision-up (Patch) software, refer to Section 2-9.
Prerequisite
• DVD-ROM : Application Software

LFC Procedures
1. After system reboot, close a Linux dialog box popped up, insert the application disk into the DVD-RAM drive,
and the disk will be auto mounted.
2. A dialog will be popped up: “Do you want to run the file “/media/cdrecorder/autorun?””, click on Run Command.
Note
If the pop-up box question does not appear after two minutes, type the following and wait approxi-
mately one minute for the pop-up box to appear.
- mount /mnt/cdrom <Enter>
- /mnt/cdrom/autorun <Enter>
3. A message window will appear. Two Modes are provided. Select Normal.
4. The following attention will display.
5. A dialog will appear: “Install Utility”, click on Load to begin loading the software.
6. A message shows: “Please remove the CT application media from the drive. Press <OK> to continue. The
system will be rebooted.” Click OK.
7. After the reboot completes and the Xwindow starts, a shell window will display, wait for about 3 minutes (for
few sites, possibly wait for over 20 minutes) and a menu window of “Select Product” will appear.
• Single product: Select BRIVO CT315
• Dual productr: Select BRIVO CT325
SYSTEM 2-9
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-8 INSTALLING APPLICATION SOFTWARE (CONTINUED)

8. 3 to 5 minutes later, a message window will appear to prompt restoring system configuration of system state.
Insert DVD-RAM or USB to restore system state.
a. If the SaveState DVD-RAM/USB exists, click on Confirm, and click on OK to keep the default setting and
proceed the procedure.
b. If the SaveState DVD-RAM/USB does not exist, click on Cancel.
Note
Restoring system state in this step just restore system configuration section.
A window of “Install Utility” will appear and disappear automatically.
9. 3 to 5 minutes later, a system configuration window appears.
2-10 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

10. Set the Time Zone and Network.
The following shows an example:
Time Zone:Asia/Shanghai Network:Click on Network->Network on

p le
xam
E
Note
For the network settings, refer to the Section 2-12-1 Configuration Setup, step 7. Network Settings
Screen (a to d)
11. Select Hardware to display Hardware Settings screen:
Using this screen, perform configuration: Hardware Diagnosis, Keyboard and Start Angle for Head Scan.
SYSTEM 2-11
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
NOTICE
The following window is displayed on initial configuration. 
For the software version 2.2x, under Initial Laser Position Angle field, select the correspond-
ing initial laser position angle according to gantry mode number. If the wrong configuration
is selected on initial configuration, you must Load-From-Cold to re-select this configuration.
• If Gantry mode number is 5323923-1 or 5324907-1, please select 0.
• If Gantry mode number is 5323923 or 5324907, please select 90.
Software Version: 1.65 Software Version: 2.2x
12. After the proper initial laser position angle is selected, press Accept button.
13. A time setup window will display, set the date and time of the system and click on set, the click on quit.
14. Wait for about 3 to 5 minutes, a message window will show to prompt restoring state, “Restore System State
data” displays. 
Click No if no Saved Data exist. Go to next step.
Click Yes if there is Saved Data DVD-RAM/USB. A message “Please choose the storage device for restoring
system state!” appears, select USB or DVD to continue.
15. “Insert DVD/USB and Press Confirm!” appears. Insert the DVD-RAM/USB containing saved state and click on
Confirm.
17. “Warning: Restoring will erase the previous contents on disk.” appears. Click on Okay.
18. Option will be installed automatically according to SaveState.
2-12 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

Note

It depends on the content of Saved Data DVD-RAM/USB that what options will appear in the
Installed Option area.
19. A License Reminder window pops up: “This software has restricted access to some service tools. This system
might need a license for special access. Please contact your GE representative for confirmation.”, then click
OK.
20. A message window appears. “ The system needs to be rebooted for the changes to take effect. Do you wish

to reboot now ”. Click Yes to restart .
21. End.
Note
When the system contains the following options, the proper entry must be required.
Denta Option:
1. Power ON a camera connected to the CT system.
2. “The procedure will send 1 or 2 films to the camera...” message appears. Enter y.
3. “Please select a printer in the list...” message appears. Select a proper printer.
4. Since a printer ejects a calibration film, measure distance (mm) printed in a film.
5. “Enter the distance Dist 1 in (mm).” message appears. Enter distance (mm) recorded in previous step.
Note: Entry must be performed in unit of mm. If you have only a ruler with inch unit, convert inch value to mm
value using a formula of “xx inch x 25.4 = yy mm”
ConnectPro Option:
1. ConnectPro setup window appears. Enter the parameters written down in 2-5, Saving Option Information,
then click on Accept.
2. PPS Server Setup window appears. Any values might be entered as a default. Enter the parameters written
down in 2-5, Saving Option Information, then click on Accept. (When the hospital does Not has a PPS server,
perform no modification and click on Accept.)
SYSTEM 2-13
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-9 INSTALLING REVISION-UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE

If the system has a revision-up (patch) software, it must be installed at this time.
If it does not, skip this section, then go to section 2-12, Changing System Configuration (reconfig).
2-9-1 Loading Revision-up Software

This is the common procedures for system revision-up.
Prerequisite
• DVD-ROM : Application Revision-up (Patch) Software
Procedures
1. Open a Unix Shell.
2. If Application software is up, perform the following command.
a. {ctuser@hostname} appShutdown
3. In the Unix Shell, become root:
a. {ctuser@hostname} su -
b. Password:#bigguy
c. Insert the Service Pack CD into DVD drive in the host.
4. Perform the following steps to install the Service Pack CD:
a. [root@hostname]#patch_install –c
b. Input y to install patch.
c. Type rpm –qa|grep ‘patchlinglong’ <Enter> 
Confirm the patches are installed.
d. Type:[root@hostname]#reboot
2-9-2 Patch Verification

1. Perform a Scout scan.
2. Perform a Helical or an Axial scan (minimum 20 slices).
3. Verify that the scans perform successfully.
2-14 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-10 UNINSTALLING REVISION-UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE
Procedures
1. Open a Unix Shell.
2. If Application software is up, perform the following command.
a. {ctuser@hostname} appShutdown
3. In the Unix Shell, become root:
a. {ctuser@hostname} su -

b. Password:<password>
4. Perform the following steps to uninstall the Service Pack CD:
a. [root@hostname]#patch_install –u
b. Input y to uninstall patch.
c. Type rpm –qa|grep ‘patchlinglong’ <Enter> 
Confirm the patches are uninstalled.
5. Type:[root@hostname]#reboot
2-10-1 Patch Verification

1. Perform a Scout scan.
2. Perform a Helical or an Axial scan (minimum 20 slices).
3. Verify that the scans perform successfully.
2-11 RESTORING THE SYSTEM STATE DATA AGAIN!

When performing the LFC, manually restore the system state data AGAIN at this time.
Do NOT start up the system yet!
Prerequisite
• DVD-RAM/USB (including the system state data saved in section 2-4)
Procedures
1. In desktop menu, select Restorestate.
2. “Do you want to restore system state?” appears. Click on Yes.
3. “Please choose the storage device for restoring system state!” appears. Click on DVD or USB to continue.
4. “Insert DVD/USB and Press Confirm!” appears. Insert the DVD-RAM into the DVD-RAM drive or plus USB disk
to PC, then click on Confirm.
SYSTEM 2-15
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
6. “Warning: Restoring will erase the previous contents on disk.” appears. Click on Okay.
7. “System state restored successfully” appears. Click on Okay.
8. Eject the DVD-RAM from the DVD-RAM drive or unplus the USB disk from PC.
NOTICE
Do NOT click on Startup at this time!
2-16 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-12 CHANGING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (RECONFIG)

The System configuration data MUST be checked or changed when a different version of the application software
has been loaded, because new setting(s) might be added in a new version of software.
2-12-1 Configuration Setup
1. In desktop menu, click on Reconfig located on the upper right of the screen.

This System configuration screen appears.
2. Enter the appropriate configuration data.
NOTICE
The following items restrict the use of characters for entry. Do NOT use other characters.
Items Characters Usable for Entry

Hospital Name alphanumerics (a-zA-Z0-9), underscore (_), period (.), comma (,), and space
Machine # numerics (0-9)
Station Name alphanumerics (a-zA-Z0-9), underscore (_), and period (.)
SYSTEM 2-17
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-12-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)

3. System Setting Screen:
a. Changes Hospital Name to the site's preferred name.

b. Select the Timezone for the site.
c. Verify Model Name.
Note
The Model Name is currently not implemented.
d. Verify Machine # .
The unique machine number # is printed on the label attached near the OC rating plate.
e. Verify/change Station Name. (Entry MUST be performed using up to 4 characters.)
f. Select Preferences to proceed to the next screen.
2-18 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

4. Preferences Setting Screen:

a. Select Time Format to be displayed on screen.

b. Select Units for patient weight for units for patient weight to be displayed on images.
Note
Select Kilograms for China customers.
c. Select Bone Kernel. (default: Type 2)
Note
“Type 2” is less artifact, but lower resolution than Type 1.
d. Select Date Format to be displayed on images.
e. Select HIPAA Present. (default: Off)
For how to use HIPAA, refer to Operator Manual, System.
Note
To use HIPAA to provide authentication authorization audit control.
SYSTEM 2-19
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

f. Select Auto mA. Select Target SD1 for higher mA, Target SD2 for middle mA, or Target SD3 for lower
mA according to the following mA table.
GE recommends ‘Target SD1‘ for Japan and ‘Target SD2‘ for countries other than Japan, but this
selection depends on a customer´s preferences. If a customer requires a different image quality, select an
other Target SD.
Auto mA modes
IQ
Normal High mA (High IQ)
SD1 IQ
Low Dose
SD2 Normal
IQ
Low Dose
Normal
SD3 Low Dose
Low mA (Low IQ)
Target SD IQ Level
SD IQ 1.63
SD Normal 1.47
- 1.40
SD Low Dose 1.33
- 1.26
- 1.22
- 1.14
- 1.10
- 1.0
2-20 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

g. Click on Configuration, then select Asymmetric mode and click on Accept.

Mode Meanings

h. Select Language to proceed to the next screen.
SYSTEM 2-21
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

5. Language Setting Screen:
a. Select the Language for this site.

b. Select Default Autovoice Language for this site.
c. Select Hardware to proceed to the next screen.
2-22 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

6. Hardware Setting Screen:

a. Select a proper Keyboard, depending on the system.
b. Click on Tube Type  ESR Tube.
c. Select Start Angle for Head Scan (Default: 90/270 (Conventional)).
d. Select Network to proceed to the next screen.
SYSTEM 2-23
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

7. Network Settings Screen:
le
a mp
Ex
a. Click on Network on.

The check box becomes red.
b. OC Parameters Setting:
i. Enter Host Name.
Host Name identifies the name of this CT. This name must be unique for the site, and will appear in
Linux prompts and in a few other places. If you set up a network connection to the site, the OC
computer will appear on the site‘s network as <Host Name>.
ii. Enter IP Address.
The IP address is administrated by a network administrator. Ask a network administrator to assign an
IP address.
iii. Enter Net Mask.(if required.)
The Net Mask is to divide the IP address between the network bits and the host bits. The Net Mask is
determined by a network administrator.
iv. Enter Gateway Address.
If possible consult the site’s network administrator before configuring the interface to the site’s network.
The site administrator should provide the Gateway IP Address.
c. DTB Network Parameters Setting:
DTB Network Parameters are default setting by system when enable ‘Network On ?’, if DTB IP Address is
updated by someone, need to modify it to ‘192.168.10.1’.
2-24 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-12-2 Completing Configuration

1. Click on Accept after completing the configuration.
The system is rebooted and returns to the desktop menu.
2. ‘Auto-Start Disabled’ message appears. Click on OK.
2-13 OPTION CHECK

1. In desktop menu, select List Options.
The option(s) currently installed is displayed.
2. Using the option list recorded at section 2-5, Saving Option Information, verify that the proper option(s) has
been correctly reloaded to the system.
3. Click on Quit.
2-14 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM NOW!

1. In desktop menu, select Shutdown to restart the system.
NOTICE
When performing Application-Shutdown and then restarting the system, always use the
Shutdown button. Do not use the Startup Button, because this might not work correctly.
2. A dialog box pops up, click on OK.
3. Click on Startup button.
4. Verify that the system starts up with no error.
5. Confirm that the latest version of software has been installed in the system. The system version is displayed
at the lower right of the screen while the system is starting up.
6. Click on OK in Attention window.
SYSTEM 2-25
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-15 CAMERA CONFIGURATION

1. On the service desktop menu, select Configuration  Install Camera.
2. The Install Camera window appears, along with a warning message pop-up box, to remind you that all filming
queues must be empty before you begin to update or delete a camera.
First, you must click OK in the warning message box.
Illustration 2-2 Camera Installation Window
3. The Graphical User Interface displayed shows a list of cameras installed. (See Illustration 2-2)
4. Click on Add button to add a new camera. (See Illustration 2-2)
2-26 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-15 CAMERA CONFIGURATION (CONFIGURATION)

5. A dialog window for the camera type (DICOM/PostScript) appears.

6. DICOM is selected.
a. A list of camera models appears (See Illustration 2-3). Select the appropriate model from the list and click
Select. Clicking Select presets all the parameters to that models except the network parameters. (See
Illustration 2-4)
Selection of a different camera model clears the Image Quality parameters, because these are camera
manufacture dependent.
Illustration 2-3 Camera Model Dialog (DICOM)
SYSTEM 2-27
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

b. Enter the Network Parameters.
• Device Name: A unique name used to identify the camera.
• Host Name: DICOM print server host name, as defined by the hospital.
• IP Address: DICOM print server IP address, ad defined by the hospital.
• Application Title: DICOM print server application entity title, as defined by the print server. You should
consult the manufacturers DICOM Conformance Statement.
Note
The Application Entity Title for the camera may be site specific. Make sure that you check with the
Camera Manufacturer’s Representative and the hospital network administrator to ensure you are
using the correct AE Title for the destination DICOM Print Camera.
• TCP/IP Listen Port: DICOM print server TCP/IP listen port, as defined by the server. You should consult
the manufacturers DICOM Conformance Statement.
• Comments: Optional comments used by the DICOM print server.
Illustration 2-4 DICOM Camera Configuration
2-28 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

c. Medium Type specifies the type of film being used. Currently, only Blue Film and Clear Film are support-
ed.
d. Set Destination to the final location for film output: either Processor or Magazine.
e. Film Orientation selects film orientation. Only Portrait is currently supported.
f. Set the Magnification Type. This parameter selects the algorithm used to interpolate pixels for proper film
resolution. Set this parameter after consulting the camera manufacture to ensure optimal image quality.
Choices are described below:

• None: No interpolation. This option is not supported by all cameras.
• Replicate: Adjacent pixels are interpolated. This can result in “pixelized” images. This algorithm is not
normal preferred.
• Bilinear: A 1st order interpolation of pixels. Results in images usually described as blurred. This algo-
rithm is not normal perferred.
• Cubic: A 3rd order interpolation. Used with a large number of possible formulations. Camera manufac-
tures define parameters called “smoothing type” to set coefficients used in this algorithm. The imple-
mentation of these “smoothing coefficients” is camera dependent.
g. Select the Standard Film Formats. Select the film format by choosing ON in the pull down menu box lo-
cated below each selection. (See Illustration 2-4) Valid film formats are set by the camera manufacture.
Example: IMATION doesn’t support 1x2, 2x4 or 4x4; AGFA doesn’t support 4x2.
The DICOM print convention designates film formats by column and row. (e.g. 12 on 1 film is 4x3)
h. After the camera has been configured, click the Advanced button. This creates the camera device file for
you automatically and pops up the Advanced Parameters screen. (See Illustration 2-5)
Illustration 2-5 Camera Attribute Dialog
SYSTEM 2-29
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

i. Advanced camera parameters control the image quality of films.
Note
For more information on the proper settings for these parameters, please see the Camera’s DICOM
Print Device Conformance Statement or the Camera Manufacturer’s Representative.
You may need to refer to a copy of the Conformance Statement as you are working with the Camera
Manufacturer’s Representative, to correctly set up the DICOM Print Camera I/Q and Time-out
Settings.
• Configuration: This parameter is camera manufacturer dependent as is typically used to specify the
image contrast. The Configuration field may be up to 1024 characters long. The field will scroll
automatically as text is entered. To review your entry, simply click and hold the middle mouse button,
while the cursor is in the field, and drag the mouse towards the right (or left) as needed.
Recommended Configuration Setting Values:
Agfa Drystar (MG3000) Perception_LUT=KANAMORI (100)
Imation Dryview (8700) LUT=0, 7
Kodak Laser Printer 190 CS434\CN0\PD1.20
• Minimum and Maximum Density: Used to set brightness of the images on film. The range of values
is 0~4095, although the valid range for a specific camera is manufacture dependent. 
For Maximum Density, input the correct value into the text box. 
For Minimum Density, set it to ON and input the correct value in the text box.
Recommended Minimum and Maximum Density Starting Values:
Agfa Drystar (MG3000) Min: 20 or 23; Max: 300
Imation Dryview (8700) Min: (Blank); Max: 300
Kodak Laser Printer 190 Min: 20; Max: 300
• Smoothing Type: Set it to ON, and input the selected value. This parameter is used when the
magnification type is CUBIC. It represents the coefficient for the image resolution algorithm. This
parameter is camera manufacturer dependent, and should be re-verified with your radiology department.
Recommended Smoothing Type Starting Values and Ranges:
Agfa Drystar (MG3000) Start Value: 140; Range: 137~150
Imation Dryview (8700) Start Value: 3; Range: 3~13
Kodak Laser Printer 190 Start Value: Enhanced; Range: Normal
• Empty Density: This parameter sets the density for empty film viewports. Typically, BLACK is used but
WHITE is an available option. The minimum and maximum density values are used as the
representation.
• Border Density: This sets the density for the border used around the film viewports. Typically, BLACK
is used but WHITE is an available option. The minimum and maximum density values are used as the
representation.
• Film Size: Allows the system to specify a particular film size, if selected.
• Trim: YES produces a white (clear) box surrounding each image.
• Priority: This sets the print priority.
2-30 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

j. If you have completed entry of advanced parameters, click Done.
Note
You can determine camera information by looking at the contents of the following files:
For DICOM Print Camera: /usr/g/ctuser/app-defaults/devices/name.cfg, name.cfg is the cam-
era device name from the printer configuration GUI.
7. PostScript is selected.
a. Enter the Network Parameters.

Illustration 2-6 PostScript Camera Configuration
• Device Name: A unique name used to identify the camera.

• Host Name: PostScript print server host name, as defined by the hospital.
• IP Address: PostScript print server IP address, ad defined by the hospital.
• Queue Name: Keep system default value.
• Comments: Optional comments used by the PostScript print server.
b. Select the Standard Film Formats. Keep system default value. (See Illustration 2-6) Valid film formats
are set by the camera manufacturer.
c. If you have completed entry of parameters, click Ok.
SYSTEM 2-31
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-16 COMPLETING THE LFC PROCEDURE
2-16-1 Restoring Patient Data

1. Restore the Patient image to the system. Refer to the Operator manual to restore examination saved. (Image
Works  CD/DVD)
2. Restore the raw data to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Scan  Scanner Utilities -> Rawdata
Function  Function Selection  Restore/Delete from DVD-RAM/USB  (Select all rawdata using shift
key.)  Rawdata Selection (e.g. Whole exam)  Start Restore)
2-16-2 Test Scan

Perform scans to verify that they are completed with no errors.
The LFC has now been completed!
2-32 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-17 INSITE INSTALLATION

For the system with the InSite ONLY, install the InSite AGAIN after LFC.
2-17-1 General
Prerequisite
• The modem must be powered up.
• Prepare the followings before starting the InSite Installation Procedure.
CD-ROM : Service Software (Must be prepared by FE, distributed through TAB 263).

TAB 263: For OS CTT6.3.9 (P/N: 5343451), InSite software V/R3.52 (P/N: 5150686)
2-17-2 Installing InSite Software

1. To display the desktop menu:
Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select Utilities  Shutdown  Application
Shutdown  OK.
2. Insert the InSite disk into the DVD-RAM drive of PC.
3. On the desktop menu, click on Install Software button located on the upper right of the screen.
4. “Do you install software from CD-ROM?” message appears.
Click on Yes.
5. “Following software will be installed” window appears.
Click on Yes.
The InSite software loading procedures is started. It takes a few minutes to complete.
SYSTEM 2-33
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-17-2 Installing InSite Software (Continued)

6. ‘Installation complete.‘ message appears.
Click on OK.
7. On the desktop menu, click on Shell button located on the upper right of the screen.
8. Type the following to eject the CD-ROM.
> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>
9. On the desktop menu, click on Install InSite button located on the upper right of the screen.
A few seconds later, the InSite Interactive Platform Configuration screen appears.
10. Click on ACCEPT three times.

Illustration 2-7 InSite Interactive Platform Configuration Screen
2-34 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-17-2 Installing InSite Software (Continued)
NOTICE
After entering InSite Setup Screen, call the local support center to set up the InSite together.
GEMS - Asia
Asia Support Center
On-Line-Center
11. After a moment, the InSite Setup Screen appears.
Click on InSite Checkout tag.

Illustration 2-8 InSite Setup Screen
SYSTEM 2-35
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-17-3 Setting up InSite Checkout
NOTICE
VERY IMPORTANT: You MUST run the checkout in order to establish the InSite connection.
Checkout MUST be rerun in the event of a system re-load.
1. The InSite Checkout Screen appears.
Click on CHECKOUT NOW.
Illustration 2-9 InSite Checkout Screen
DISABLE INSITE
2-36 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-17-3 Setting up InSite Checkout (Continued)

2. The ‘Configure InSite Now‘ window appears.
3. Click on OK.
Illustration 2-10 Configure InSite Now Window

4. To perform an InSite checkout, call your local technical support center.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
The OLC Checkout procedure depends on whether or not a customer‘s system has iLinq
license. For a iLinq-licensed system, verify that iLinq icon is seen next to the Service Icon
after the checkout has been successfully completed.

----------------------------------------------------------------------
5. When the checkout process has been completed successfully, you might get some messages such as “InSite
Dial out Check completed Successfully” from a local support center.
SYSTEM 2-37
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-17-4 Completing the insite installation

1. Click on Exit to complete the InSite installation.
Illustration 2-11 Closing the InSite Setup
DISABLE INSITE
InSite has now been installed!
2-38 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-17-5 Saving InSite Information

The configuration files for Class M software and InSite features are saved to DVD-RAM/USB as part of the Save
System State process.
1. Set the write protect tab of the DVD-RAM to the write position and insert the DVD-RAM into the DVD-RAM drive
or plus USB disk to PC.
2. On the desktop menu, click on Savestate.
3. Click on Confirm.
4. Click on Continue several times according to the messages to be displayed.

The DVD-RAM/USB auto-format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the DVD-RAM/
USB.
Note
You can see the message ‘This is an Optical containing a file system.‘ after clicking ‘Continue‘
button several times. This is the last chance to cancel the procedure “Saving system state data”. If
‘Continue‘ is clicked on this message, you can NOT cancel this procedure any more.
5. ‘System State Saved Successfully‘ appears. Click on Continue.
6. Eject the DVD-RAM from the DVD-RAM drive or unplug the USB disk from PC.
7. In desktop menu, select Shutdown to restart the system.
NOTICE
When performing Application-Shutdown and then restarting the system, always use the
Shutdown button. Do not use the Startup Button, because this might not work correctly.
8. Verify that the system starts up with no error.
SYSTEM 2-39
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-18 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips

The following is a summary of troubleshooting information for DICOM Print that was gathered during software testing
and validation of the DICOM Print feature.
ERROR BRINGING UP THE CAMERA INSTALLATION/FILMING APPLICATION

• Symptom: After creating/modifying the DICOM Print Camera the install camera interface does not come
up and the filming application indicates it cannot bring up the film composer.
Cause: The configuration field contains invalid information such as a backslash (\) as the final character
in the field or brackets ({}).
• Solution: The camera.dev file in ‘~ctuser/app-defaults/devices’ must be manually edited to remove the
offending characters in the set configuration line. Invalid characters include \{}
CONFIGURATION INFORMATION FIELD

• Solution: Hold down the middle mouse button and move the field contents
NEED TO SET DICOM PRINT ATTRIBUTES NOT SUPPORTED BY SOFTWARE

• Symptom: User wants the white border around each image box ON/OFF permanently for this system
and it cannot be set as the default for the camera.
• Solution: Using your favorite editor, add the following line to the camera.dev file located in ‘~ctuser/app-
defaults/devices’ after the DICOM Print device has been otherwise configured.
For Trim Off - set TRIM NO
For Trim On - set TRIM YES
• Symptom: DICOM Print Camera supports multiple film sizes and the User only wants to print if the Film
Size is correct for [14x17]. [Otherwise the camera will queue the films or return an error causing the
queue to pause (based upon the DICOM Print Camera specifications).]
• Solution: Using your favorite editor, add the following line to the camera.dev file located in ‘~ctuser/app-
defaults/devices’ after the DICOM Print device has been otherwise configured.
To force a 14x17 film size - set filmSize 14INX17IN
a. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select Utilities -> Shutdown ->
Application Shutdown -> OK.
b. Click on Shell.
2-40 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-18 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips (CONTINUED)

c. Type as follows:
> cd /usr/g/ctuser/app-defaults/devices <Enter> 

> ls *.dev
<Enter> 
camera.dev(This is the file for a laser imager.)
di3.dev(Example; This is the file for DICOM printer.)
xxx.dev(Example; another DICOM printer)
> nedit di3.dev <Enter> (Example; the current DICOM printer is ‘di3.dev’.)

d. Add the following line to the dev file for the current DICOM printer.
#first the obligatory fields

set dName îdi3î
set dPort 104
set dComment îî
set dType digital
set dColour greyscale
set dQueueType DICM
set dQueueName dicom
set dAppTitle îdi3î
set dIPAddress X.XX.XXX.XXX
set dHostName di3
set filmSize 14INX17IN (Add this line here!)

#then the optional fields
e. Select File -> Save.
f. Type exit <Enter> to terminate the shell window.
NEED TO PREVENT DICOM PRINT ATTRIBUTES FROM BEING SENT TO DICOM PRINT CAMERA
• Symptom: Some DICOM Print attributes are optional, and may result in fatal errors. For example, the
Fuji camera does not support the Empty Image Density parameter for the film box.
• Solution: Using your favorite editor, add the following line(s) to the camera.dev file located in ‘~ctuser/
app-defaults/devices‘ after the DICOM Print device has been otherwise configured.
- To prevent sending the Smoothing Parameter set FB_Smooth FALSE
- To prevent sending the Border Density set FB_Border FALSE
- To prevent sending the Empty Image Density set FB_EID FALSE
- To prevent sending the Minimum Density set FB_MinD FALSE
- To prevent sending the Trim Parameter set FB_Trim FALSE
SYSTEM 2-41
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-18 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips (CONTINUED)
ERROR TRYING TO CONNECT TO THE DICOM PRINT CAMERA

• Symptom: DICOM Print server can be reached (ping), but Application error indicates ‘Unable to start
filming interface‘ and the help message talks about running the install.dasm (Association Error)
• Solution: The system is unable to complete the association. Check the AE Title and the Port number of
the DICOM Print Server and correct them using reconfiguration, CT Camera setting screen.
FILM COMPOSER ERROR NOT USABLE

• Symptom: Film Composer error says ‘unrecognized status - code 0‘
• Solution: Review the log file, the attention and status windows. These areas have the correct filming
status (e.g. film jam, supply empty)
DEBUGGING CONNECTION ISSUES DIFFICULT

• Symptom: The timeouts for the DICOM Print are very long, which means one needs to wait a long time
before you know the application is not working.
• Solution: The timeouts for the DICOM Print were setup to ensure that the system would work regardless
of whether the DICOM Print Camera was on a LAN or a WAN halfway around the world. The DICOM
Print timeouts for the association and DIMSE classes (e.g. N-GET, N-DELETE) can be modified within
the DICOM Print camera installation. They can be reduced down to 90 seconds.
DICOM PRINT ERROR ON N-GET TIMEOUT CONFUSING

• Symptom: When the N-GET timeout goes off, the error message in the prslog file will be ‘Could not get
printer status, invalid command sequence for N-GET‘.
• Solution: When the User sees the above error they may want to consider that the issue may be an
inactivity timer on the N-GET DIMSE Service.
DICOM PRINT CAMERA SLIDE SUPPORT

• Symptom: Current implementation of DICOM Print does not allow selection of slide format.
• Solution: Feature not currently supported. Possibly in future releases.
CONFUSION ON FILM FORMAT NOTATION

• Symptom: GEMS Laser Camera and DICOM Print film format notations are opposite.
• Solution: GEMS Laser Camera film format notation has always been
- row x col (e.g. 12 on 1 = 4x3)
- DICOM Print Standard film format notation is
- col x row (e.g. 12 on 1 = 3x4)
2-42 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-19 AUTOFILM SETTING FUNCTION

This function is used for changing at a time the camera type of all protocols which already have been set.
This can change the parameters of Destination and Format in Autofilm Setup screen. The other settings in Autofilm
Setup screen and all settings of Film Tab Card in View/Edit Screen are NOT changed.
Autofilm Setup
Destination
Laser Camera

Format Size Auto Start Auto Print
Normal Slide Yes Yes
Copies Exam Page Series Page
Yes Yes
Scout XRef–Scout
Film Direction
Top to Bottom
Auto Film Composer Show Grayscale
e/s/i Yes
Changed
OK Cancel
NOT Changed
Film Tab Card
Scan Timing Recon Film
Auto Frame Width Level Mag User GSE

Interval Flip Rotate
Film Format 1 1 Factor Anno.
Recon 1 Recon 1 Recon 2 Recon 2 Recon 3 Recon 3

Film Set Film Set Film Set Film Set Film Set Film Set
NOT Changed 1 2 1 2 1 2
SYSTEM 2-43
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
2-44 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 3 - X-RAY ALIGNMENT FOR BRIVO CT315
NOTICE
For Calibration /Alignment access restricted sites, please get a “password” through the ded-
icated Intranet or the Service Call Center before doing Alignment/Calibration (a pop-window
will provide a “key” that is needed to generate the password). The access will be granted
SECTION 3 - X-RAY ALIGNMENT FOR

for 48 hours.
For access free sites (decided by local service businesses), please get a “license” through
the dedicated Intranet or the Service Call Center after software load (a pop-window will pro-
vide a “key” that is needed to generate this License). No password is needed to access Cal-
BRIVO CT315
ibration/Alignment since then.
3-1 GENERAL
This ‘X-ray Alignment’ consists of the following check/adjustment procedures:
1. Plane of Rotation
2. Detector Beam-on-Window
3. Gravity SAG
4. ISO Center Alignment
5. Filter Center Alignment

Perform these procedures in the following order:
1. Plane of Rotation  2. Detector Beam-on-Window  3. Gravity SAG  4. ISO Center Alignment
 5. Filter Center Alignment

The ‘3. Gravity SAG’ procedure is a check procedure for the Gantry rotating mechanism (bend, vibrations, etc.).
Perform this check if considered necessary.

If you are sure that some procedures do not have to be performed, in this case, the possible allowed procedure
combination/order should be one of the following:
1  2  4  5 or
2  4  5 or
4  5 or
5
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD !
IN THIS ‘X-RAY ALIGNMENT’, GANTRY COMPONENTS ARE ADJUSTED AND SCANS ARE
PERFORMED. ALWAYS SWITCH OFF THE ‘CB3’ SWITCH BEFORE SERVICING OR
ADJUSTING THE GANTRY. ALSO VERIFY THAT NO PEOPLE ARE IN THE SCAN ROOM
WHENEVER A SCAN IS PERFORMED.
SYSTEM 3-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Requirements
The critical components for X-ray Alignment are all mounted directly to the rotating Gantry; they are:
• X-ray tube
• Collimator (includes a bow-tie filter and an adjustable beam defining exit slit)
• Detector
Tools and materials required for x-ray alignment:
• Polaroid film packs and Polaroid film holder (developer for Polaroid film) for Plane of Rotation alignment
Film holder (2204748 X 2) for Detector Beam-on-window alignment
• Alignment JIG bracket (5371128) and alignment JIG (5371129)
• G-SAG pin (attached on the bottom of the collimator) for Gravity SAG
3-2 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Gantry Geometry
Gantry geometrical direction definitions:
THETA THETA
THETA - Tangent to Gantry rotation.

Clockwise (+)

Counterclockwise (-)
Adjustment possible for:
X-ray Tube, Collimator, Detector
BRIVO CT315
Zero degrees (HOME) 6 o’clock
Z-Axis - Parallel to the axis of Gantry rotation.

Toward the Table (-)
Away from the Table (+)
Z-Axis
X-ray Tube, Detector
Polaroid Film Use

Use a Polaroid film pack, a Polaroid film holder or squeeze roller for development as follows:
1. Develop a Polaroid film pack with the film holder.
2. Break the chemical pod over a table edge, or use a squeeze roller as follows:
a. Apply heavy pressure to break the pod.
b. Ease up slightly to spread the developer evenly over the film.
SYSTEM 3-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-2 JIG UNIFORMITY TEST
Prerequisite:
• Alignment Jig (x1)
• JIG Holder
JIG Holder
Alignment JIG
Procedure:
1. Preparation:
a. Remove the left side cover from the Gantry.
b. Switch OFF the ‘CB2’, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
c. Remove the right side, both top and front covers from the Gantry.
d. Switch ON the ‘CB2’ switch.
e. Rotate the Gantry to home position by hand.
f. Remove the bow-tie filter from the collimator.
3-4 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-2 JIG UNIFORMITY TEST (CONTINUED)

2. Switch ON the ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.
3. Place the JIG onto the JIG holder and install the JIG holder to the cradle.
Adjust the JIG holder and JIG position according to the positioning light shown in below figure.
Note
Please pay attention to the JIG installation position on the JIG holder if screw is not on the JIG. (See
below Illustration)
Illustration 3-1 JIG and JIG Holder Position

Screw Hole
BRIVO CT315
Cradle
Adjustment Screw
(To adjust it for JIG axial position)
To adjust JIG holder horizontal position for JIG horizontal position
4. Press ‘External Landmark’ to position the positioning light to the 190.
Illustration 3-2 External Landmark
External Landmark
SYSTEM 3-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-2 JIG UNIFORMITY TEST (CONTINUED)

5. Select Service  Calibration  Automated Alignment  Sequence  JIG Test, click OK.
6. Follow prompts displayed on the monitor screen to perform Air Scan and Tool Scan.
7. “The uniformity of JIG is good.” displays on the monitor screen, click OK.
If “The uniformity of JIG is not good.” displays on the monitor screen, plsease reorder a set of alignment JIG
to ensure alignment data exactness.
3-6 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-3 PLANE OF ROTATION
3-3-1 Polaroid Film

This procedure checks and adjusts the plane of rotation of the x-ray fan beam until it is perpendicular to the axis of
Gantry rotation within 0.5 mm, for Small Focus and 0.75 mm, for Large Focus.
1. Preparation:
c. Remove the right side, both top and front covers from the Gantry. (The rear cover should remain installed

to attach a Polaroid film onto it later)
e. Rotate the Gantry to the home position by hand.
BRIVO CT315
2. Place a Polaroid film at the Gantry 180 deg. position:
Place a Polaroid film within the scan circle as follows:
a. Mark a ‘T’ on the film to identify the Table side. (See Illustration 3-4)
b. Attach the film on the bottom ring of the Gantry rear cover using adhesive tape. And put a lead plate on the
film. (See Illustration 3-3) (If a lead plate is not available, use a piece of solder)
Illustration 3-3 Placing a Polaroid Film
X-Ray
Tube
Gantry Rear Cover
Table
Lead Plate
Attach Polaroid Film

Detector using Adhesive Tape
SYSTEM 3-7
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-3 PLANE OF ROTATION (CONTINUED)

4. Scan a Polaroid film, follow the following steps to perform scan.
a. Select Service  Diagnostics  Offline Scan.
b. Perform the following stationary scan:
Scan 1 Scan 2
AZIMUTH : 0 deg AZIMUTH : 180 deg
SCAN TIME : 2.0 sec SCAN TIME : 2.0 sec
THICKNESS : 2 mm THICKNESS : 2 mm
kV : 120 kV kV : 120 kv
mA : 60 mA mA : 60 mA
(Others) : (defaults) (Others) : (defaults)
c. Remove the film pack.
d. Develop the film. Wait the required film development time described on the film pack.
5. Check if the narrow exposure lies within the wider exposure, and the center lines of the two beams coincide
within 0.75 mm (see illustration 3-4):
XF-XR < 0.75 mm  proceed to step 6.

2
XF-XR >0.75 mm  proceed to the next step 5.

2
Where XF: the front width not covered by the narrow beam
XR: the rear width not covered by the narrow beam
Illustration 3-4 Narrow and Wide Exposure

TABLE XR GANTRY
XF
Measure XF-XR
2
Narrow Beam
(Tube at 180 deg. THETA) Wide Beam
(Tube at 0 deg. THETA)
3-8 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

6. Adjust the tube Z-Axis position:
a. Switch OFF the “CB4” and “XG Power” switches.
b. Rotate the Gantry until the Tube reaches the 12 o’clock (home) position by hand.
c. Loosen the 4 mounting bolts and 2 support bolts. (See Illustration 3-7)
d. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for Z-Axis; note that there are two Z-Axis nuts for adjustment.
e. Loosen the nuts that faces the direction in which you want to shift the tube.

f. Adjust the x-ray tube position by turning the adjustment nuts by the amount instructed on the monitor
screen.
See illustration 3-4; in this example, the tube should be shifted axially toward the Table to center the wide
beam over the narrow beam.
BRIVO CT315
g. Tighten the nuts previously loosened in step e.
h. Tighten the 4 mounting bolts and 2 support bolts. (Torque: 280 kgf.cm)
i. Switch ON the ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
j. Return to step 2.
7. Proceed to Section 3-4, ‘Detector Beam-on-Window.’
Illustration 3-5 X-ray Tube Positioning
Mounting Bolt (x4)
Rear Front
t
gh
Ri
ft
Le
Nut D Nut C Support Nut B Nut A

(Adjustment Nuts C&D for Theta) Bolt (x2) (Adjustment Nuts A&B for Z-Axis)
SYSTEM 3-9
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

Note
When loosening respective adjustment nuts, use two spanners. One spanner holds one nut, the
other one loosens another nut. This will avoid damaging the adjustment nuts when adjusting the
position of the nut. Please refer to above photo.
Nut to be loosened Direction to move

or Tightened Front Rear Left Right
Nut A Loosened Tightened - -
Nut B Tightened Loosened - -
Nut C - - Tightened Loosened
Nut D - - Loosened Tightened
Note: One turn = 1 mm shift.
3-10 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-3-2 Alignment JIG
Prerequisite:
• JIG Holder
JIG Holder

BRIVO CT315
Alignment JIG
Purpose:
This procedure checks and adjusts the plane of rotation of the X-ray fan beam until it is perpendicular to the axis of
Gantry rotation.
Procedure:
NOTICE
Please keep Tube temperature for whole POR alignment procedure.
1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘JIG Uniformity Test’ procedure.
c. Remove the right side, both top and front covers from the Gantry.
e. Rotate the Gantry to home position by hand.
SYSTEM 3-11
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

3. Place the JIG onto the JIG holder and install the JIG holder to the cradle.
Adjust the JIG holder and JIG position according to the positioning light shown in below figure.
Note
Please pay attention to the JIG installation position on the JIG holder if screw is not on the JIG. (See
below Illustration)
Illustration 3-6 JIG and JIG Holder Position

Screw Hole
Cradle
Adjustment Screw
(To adjust it for JIG axial position)
To adjust JIG holder horizontal position for JIG horizontal position
4. Select Service  Calibration  Automated Alignment  Sequence  POR, click OK.

5. Back the cradle to keep the Gantry Aperture is clear.
3-12 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

6. Follow prompts displayed on the monitor screen to perform Warm Up and Stabilize.
Warm Up
Make sure that the Bowtie Filter is removed and

Gantry Aperture is clear.
Press <Confirm> and <Start Scan> to start Scan.
BRIVO CT315
7. Follow prompts displayed on the monitor screen to perform Air Scan.
Air Scan
Remove the Bowtie Filter

Keep the Aperture clear for Air Scan
SYSTEM 3-13
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

8. Move the cradle to “0” position to perform Tool Scan (Gantry Azimuth 0 deg).
9. If the alignment JIG position is in the specification, please click OK and directly skip to step 13.
le
mp
E xa
3-14 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

10. If the alignment JIG position is not in the specification, please adjust the JIG offset within  0.2mm scope ac-
cording to prompts displayed on the monitor screen. (Adjustment screw one turn: approximately 0.8mm shift)
Clockwise: FWD, towards the Table
Counterclockwise: BWD, away from the Table

BRIVO CT315
p le
xam
E
11. Repeat Warm Up process, then perform Table Scan.
NOTICE
Don’t follow prompts displayed on the monitor screen to clear the Gatry Aperture.
SYSTEM 3-15
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

12. Return to step 8 to perform Tool Scan (Gantry Azimuth 0 deg) till the alignment JIG position is in the speci-
fication.
13. Perform Tool Scan (Gantry Azimuth 180 deg), and follow prompts displayed on the monitor screen to adjust
the Tube offset.
p le
xam
E

a. Switch OFF the ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.
b. Rotate the Gantry until the Tube reaches the 12 o’clock (home) position by hand.
d. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for Z-Axis; note that there are two Z-Axis nuts for adjustment.
screen.
i. Switch ON the ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
j. Return to step 13 to perform Tool Scan (Gantry Azimuth 180 deg) till the tube Z-Axis position is in the
specification.
3-16 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Mounting Bolt (x4)

Rear Front
t
gh
Ri
ft
Le
BRIVO CT315
Note

SYSTEM 3-17
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-4 DETECTOR BEAM-ON-WINDOW
3-4-1 Polaroid Film

To ensure that the entire width of the x-ray beam falls within the Detector window, follow this procedure for a Z-Axis
position check/adjustment of the Detector.
1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Plane of Rotation’ procedure.
c. Remove all the Gantry covers.
d. Remove the bow-tie filter from the collimator.
e. Switch ON the ‘CB2’ switch.
f. Rotate the Gantry until the Tube reaches the 12 o’clock (home) position by hand.
Wait ten minutes or more following the last scan prior to proceeding to the next step.
2. Scan Polaroid films inserted into the film holders:
a. Insert a Polaroid film to the three film holders with the side marked “THIS SIDE TOWARD LENS” facing
down and the “INSERT THIS END” toward the Gantry when placed on the Detector. Make sure that the
films are fully inserted into the holders, otherwise you may lose part of the image. (See Illustration 3-8)
Film Holders
Since the Z-Axis position of the Detector is adjusted on three locations (right, left, and center of the
Detector), three film holders are provided: two for the right and left ends of the Detector, and one for center.
b. Mount the three film holders with film onto the right and left ends and the center, of the Detector. When
installing the center film holder, push it toward the Gantry until its center tab touches the center mounting
support of the Detector. (See Illustrations 3-8)
c. Switch ON the ‘CB2’, CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
Illustration 3-8 Film Holder Placement
Film
Film
Film
3-18 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-4 DETECTOR BEAM-ON-WINDOW (CONTINUED)

3. Perform a stationary scan on the films:
a. Select Service  Diagnostics  Offline Scan.
b. In this menu, perform the following stationary scan:
AZIMUTH: 0 deg
SCAN TIME: 2.0 sec
THICKNESS: 7 mm
kV: 120 kV
mA: 60 mA

c. Remove the film holders.
d. Develop the film. Wait the required film development time described on the film pack.
BRIVO CT315
e. Mark ‘Left’, ‘Right’, or ‘Center’ and ‘Table’ or ‘Gantry’ on the film as appropriate.
4. Examine the films for axial centering of the x-ray beam to the center line of the Detector window: (See Illustra-
tion 3-9)
You should see both the top and bottom edges of x-ray. The edges should be well defined.
Illustration 3-9 Beam-on-Window Exposure
H8 HC H1
Xw Xc Xw
LEFT CENTER RIGHT
Measure if the x-ray beam centering falls within the following values:
XW - H1 XW - H8 XC - HC
2 < 0.5 mm 2 < 0.5 mm H1 - H8 < 0.5 mm 2 < 0.5 mm
If these are not met, perform step 5.

If these are met, proceed to step 6.
SYSTEM 3-19
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

5. Adjust the Detector Z-Axis position:
a. Check that the Gantry is at the home position.
b. Switch OFF the “CB4” and “XG Power” switches.
c. Remove the flexible cable cover by unscrewing its 4 screws and 2 nuts from the DAS. (See Illustration 3-14)
Illustration 3-10 Flexible Cable Cover Removal

Nut (x2)
Flexible Cable
Cover
Screw (x4)
3-20 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

d. Loosen the two mounting screws and a locking screw (Allen cap head) from the Detector. (See Illustration
3-15)
Illustration 3-11 Beam-On-Window Adjustment
Mounting Screw
(Allen Head)
Z-Axis
Adjustment Nut

BRIVO CT315
Detector
Detector
Support Plate Detector
Pin
Locking Screw
(Allen Head)
Z-Axis
Adjustment Nut
Detector Detector
Support Plate
SYSTEM 3-21
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

e. Turn Z-Axis adjustment nut to shift the Detector along the Z-Axis according to below:
CW: away from the Table
CCW: toward the Table
One Turn: approximately 0.75mm shift.
Distance to be shifted: Distance measured in step 4, i.e.;

XW - H1
2 for right side
XW - H8
2 for left side
XC - HC
2 for center
f. Tighten the two mounting screws and a locking screws.

Screws Torque: 11 Nm (117 kgf.cm)
g. Switch ON the “CB4” and “XG Power” switches.
h. Return to step 2.
6. Proceed to ‘Gravity SAG’ or Section 3-6, ‘ISO Center Alignment.’
3-22 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-4-2 Alignment JIG
Prerequisite:
Purpose:

Procedure:
1. Preparation:
BRIVO CT315
e. Switch ON the ‘CB2’ switch.
f. Rotate the Gantry until the Tube reaches the 12 o’clock (home) position by hand.
Wait ten minutes or more following the last scan prior to proceeding to the next step.
3. Select Service  Calibration  Automated Alignment  Sequence  BOW, click OK.
4. Back the cradle to keep the Gantry Aperture is clear.
5. Follow prompts displayed on the monitor screen to perform Warm Up and Stabilize.
Warm Up
Make sure that the Bowtie Filter is removed and

Gantry Aperture is clear.
SYSTEM 3-23
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

6. Follow prompts displayed on the monitor screen to perform Air Scan.
Air Scan
Remove the Bowtie Filter

Keep the Aperture clear for Air Scan &
7. Place the three JIGs onto the Detector (Left, Center, Right) shown in Illustration 3-12.
Note
The left and right JIGs should abut against screws on the Detector. (See Illustration 3-12)
Illustration 3-12 JIG Position
Right
Left
Left
Center
3-24 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

8. Follow prompts displayed on the monitor screen to perform Tool Scan (Gantry Azimuth 0 deg).
Tool Scan (Gantry Azimuth 0 deg)
Set the Alignment Tools on the detector.

BRIVO CT315
9. Follow prompts displayed on the monitor screen to adjust the Detector offset.
Illustration 3-13 Results for BOW
Results
Move Detector Center: -0.5272mm FWD (-0.70r)

Move Detector Right: -0.0803mm FWD (-0.11r)
Move Detector Left: -0.5558mm FWD (-0.74r)
Center: +-0.5mm. Right: +-0.5mm. Left: +-0.5mm
p le
xam
E
SYSTEM 3-25
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

b. Switch OFF the “CB4” and “XG Power” switches.

Nut (x2)
Flexible Cable
Cover
Screw (x4)
3-26 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

3-15)
Illustration 3-15 Beam-On-Window Adjustment
Mounting Screw
(Allen Head)
Z-Axis
Adjustment Nut

BRIVO CT315
Detector
Detector
Pin
Locking Screw
(Allen Head)
Z-Axis
Adjustment Nut
Detector Detector
Support Plate
SYSTEM 3-27
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

e. Turn Z-Axis adjustment nut to shift the Detector offset within  0.5mm scope along the Z-Axis according to
Illustration 3-13: (Adjustment nut one turn: approximately 0.75mm shift)
Clockwise: BWD, away from the Table
Counterclockwise: FWD, toward the Table
f. Repeat Warm Up and Tool Scan (Gantry Azimuth 0 deg) till the Detector Z-Axis position is in the speci-
fication.
g. Tighten the two mounting screws and a locking screws.
h. Switch ON the “CB4” and “XG Power” switches.
i. Reinstall the flexible cable cover by screwing its 4 screws and 2 nuts.
11. Proceed to ‘Gravity SAG’ or Section 3-6, ‘ISO Center Alignment.’
3-28 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-5 GRAVITY SAG

1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Detector Beam-on-Window’
procedure.
c. Remove the Gantry covers except the rear cover.

e. Switch ON the ‘CB2’, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
NOTICE
BRIVO CT315
The detector temperature must be at a specified temperature before alignment, otherwise
alignment result is not exact.
2. Select Gravity SAG, refer to below:
Service  Calibration  Gravity SAG

3. Within the Gravity sag window, click on Confirm and press the <Start scan> button to perform air scans
automatically.
4. After completing air scans, the following message displays:
******************************* Displayed *******************************
Set pin of center to aperture and press <Confirm> and <Start Scan> to start
scan.
5. install the G-SAG pin:
a. Rotate the Gantry manually in the CW direction until the x-ray tube is positioned at the bottom.
b. Move the G-SAG pin into the position shown in Illustration 3-16.
Illustration 3-16 Installing G-SAG Pin
(Original Position) (Moved)
SAG Pin
BOTTOM VIEW OF THE COLLIMATOR
SYSTEM 3-29
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-5 GRAVITY SAG (CONTINUED)

6. Click on Confirm and press the <Start scan> button to perform G-SAG PIN scans automatically.
G-SAG calculation is automatically performed and its result is displayed.
m ple
E xa
7. If the Gravity SAG data is out of specifications, verify that the detector mounting bolts and x-ray tube mounting
bolts are correctly torqued, and then perform this ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure again.
8. Replace the G-SAG pin to the original postion. (See illustration 3-16)
9. Proceed to Section 3-6, ‘ISO Center Alignment’ if you performed the ‘Detector Beam-on-Window’ procedure
prior to this ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure; or you do not perform ‘ISO Center Alignment’ or ‘Filter Center Alignment’
(Section 3-7), perform the following:
10. Installed the bow-tie filter.
3-30 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-6 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT

This ‘ISO Center Alignment’ aligns the x-ray tube focus to the FOV center and the Detector center channel.
Illustration 3-17 ISO Center Adjustment
Adjust
X-ray
Tube
Focus

BRIVO CT315
Center of FOV
CH1
Detector
Center Channel:
342.75 + 0.02 CH
Note
Within the ‘Automated Alignment’ menu (Service  Calibration  Automated Alignment), you don
not have to perform the following menus:
‘Tube Rough ISO Alignment’
‘Radial Alignment’
These are performed at the GEHW factory only.
1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Detector Beam-on-Window’ or ‘Gravity
SAG’ procedure.
SYSTEM 3-31
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-6 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT (CONTINUED)
NOTICE
2. Select Tube ISO Alignment, refer to below:
Service  Calibration  Automated Alignment  Tube ISO Alignment

Perform air and pin scans, following the prompts displayed on the monitor screen.
Pin Setting Procedure

a. Set the phantom holder.
Repeat the steps b. to d. until obtaining the Pin Setting specified below.
b. Attach a test pin at the hole 5cm ISO center-right offset.
c. Perform the Scout 0° scan and adjust the pin angle to 0 ± 2°. (Illustration 3-19a)
d. Perform the Scout 90° scan and adjust the pin angle to 0 ± 2°. (Illustration 3-19b)
Illustration 3-18 Pin Scan
3-32 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Illustration 3-19 Pin Angles for Scout 0° and 90°
a) Scout 0° b) Scout 90°

CT/e SYS#CT01 S 50 G.E. MedicalSystems CT/e SYS#CT01 A 256 G.E. MedicalSystems
Ex: 511 Ex: 511
Sc: 2 SCOUT no_name_511 Sc: 2 SCOUT no_name_511
Im: 1 7858 Im: 4 7858
Pin
Nov 07 200X Nov 07 200X
512 x 100 100 x 512

Pin Angle
Pin Angle
1 1 Pin
R L S I
2 2 5 5
BRIVO CT315
5 5 0 0
6 6
1: distance 101mm, angle 2 1:distance 101mm, angle 89
kV 120 kV 120
mA 80 mA 80
Az 0 Az 90
11:17:47 11:11:11
W:1079 L:64 I 50 W:1079 L:64 P 256
3. Check that the calculated ISO Center Channel data is within a specification.
If the Mean Value is out of specification (342.75  0.02), perform the following steps, then follow the prompts
displayed on the monitor screen.
a. Adjust the x-ray tube Theta (tangential) position:
i. Rotate the Gantry (Tube) to the 12 o’clock (home) position.
ii. Switch OFF the ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
iii. Loosen the 4 mounting bolts and 2 support bolts. (See illustration 3-7)
iv. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for THETA; note that there are two THETA nuts for adjustment.
v. Loosen the nuts that faces the direction in which you want to shift the tube.
vi. Adjust the x-ray tube position by turning the adjustment nut by the amount instructed on the monitor
screen.
vii. Tighten the nuts previously loosened in step v.
viii. Tighten the 4 mounting bolts and 2 support bolts. (Torque: 280 kgf.cm)
ix. Switch ON the ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU .
4. Proceed to Section 3-7, ‘Filter Center Alignment.’
SYSTEM 3-33
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-7 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT
Prerequisite
• Filter Center Alignment Tool : 2265899
Procedures
This ‘Filter Center Alignment’ aligns the filter to the x-ray tube and the Detector.
Illustration 3-20 Filter Center Alignment
X-ray (Fixed)
Tube
Focus
Center of Filter
Adjust
Filter
Ch1
Detector (Fixed)
Filter Center Ch.: 342.75 + 0.3
VIEW FROM TABLE

1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘ISO Center Alignment’ procedure.
a. Remove the left side cover from the Gantry
3-34 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-7 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT (CONTINUED)
NOTICE
2. Select Bowtie Filter Alignment, refer to below:
Service Menu  Calibration  Automated Alignment  Bowtie Filter Alignment

Perform air and filter scans, following the prompts displayed on the monitor screen.

3. Check that the calculated Filter Center Channel data is within a specification:
If the Average Value is out of specification (342.75  0.3), perform the following steps, then follow the prompts
BRIVO CT315
le
a mp
E x
SYSTEM 3-35
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

a. Adjust the filter Theta (tangential) position:
ii. Loosen the two bolts indicated in illustration 3-22.
iii. Rotate the adjustment screw to shift the filter for the amount instructed on the monitor screen.
One turn 1 mm filter shift.
Illustration 3-22 Filter Center Adjustment
Loosen these Bolts

Adjustment
Screw
Collimator with Front Cover Removed
iv. Tighten the two bolts loosened in step ii.

3-36 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-8 RADIAL ALIGNMENT

Note
The radial alignment is rarely performed. Only when loosening the detector locking screws (see
Illustration 3-24), this must be performed.
Prerequisite
• Radial Alignment Tool : 2234059
1. Preparation:

b. Switch OFF the ‘CB2‘, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
d. Switch ON the ‘CB2’ switch at the PDU.
BRIVO CT315
e. Rotate the Gantry (Tube) to the 12 o‘clock (home) position.
g. Remove the Flexible Cable Cover from the DAS assy. (See Illustration 3-14)
h. Switch ON the ‘CB4‘ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
NOTICE
2. Select Radial Alignment, refer to below:
Service Menu  Calibration  Automated Alignment  Radial Alignment

Perform air and tool scans, following the prompts displayed on the monitor screen.
(Attachment of the Radial Alignment Tool is as shown in illustration 3-23 (A).)
Repeat the above scans for the other tool attachment to obtain calculated Radial Alignment data.
(Attachment of the Radial Alignment Tool is as shown in illustration 3-23 (A’).)
SYSTEM 3-37
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-8 RADIAL ALIGNMENT (CONTINUED)
Illustration 3-23 Radial Alignment Tool
Radial Alignment Tool
A'
3. Check that an average of the 2 calculated Radial Alignment data is within a specification.
If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the Radial Alignment tool.
b. Install a Dial Indicator on the side of the Detector using an attachment tool.
c. Loosen the two mounting screws and a locking screw.
d. Refer to the Average Value, rotate the Detector in the specified distance and direction.
e. Tighten the mounting screws and the locking screw.
• Screws Torque: 11 Nm (117 kgf.cm)
f. Remove the Dial Indicator with attachment tool.
g. Repeat the Radial Alignment procedure, to verify the adjustment.
3-38 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Illustration 3-24 Install the Dial Indicator
Mounting Screw_Right

BRIVO CT315
Dial Indicator
Locking Screw
Detector
Attachment Tool
Mounting Screw_Left
4. Perform the following alignment:
• ISO Center Alignment
• Filter Center Alignment
Restore the Gantry to original configuration.
SYSTEM 3-39
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
3-40 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 4 - X-RAY ALIGNMENT FOR BRIVO CT325
NOTICE

for 48 hours.
BRIVO CT325
4-1 GENERAL
This ‘X-ray Alignment’ consists of the following check/adjustment procedures and must be performed in this order.
Order X-Ray Alignment Item Description

Adjusts parallelism and detector Z-axis position to Gantry bearing sur-
1 Detector Position Alignment
face
Adjusts the aperture parallelism and distance between the aperture
2 Aperture Position Alignment
and Gantry bearing surface
Filmless POR:The tube warm-up scans are automatically performed
until the case temperatrue becomes 30%, then the tube position in Z-
3 Plane Of Rotation(POR)
axis direction is adjusted. The tube travel is calculated from the count
ratio A(A+B) of 150 channels (R50ch, C50ch, and L50ch).
Filmless BOW:The tube warm-up scans are automatically performed
Detector Beam-On-Win- until the case temperatrue becomes 30%, then the Detector position in
4
dow(BOW) Z-axis direction is adjusted. The tube travel is calculated from the
count ratio A (A+B) of 150 channels (R50ch, C50ch, and L50ch).
Compensates sensitivity between A and B slices for Z-axis beam
5 Qcal Channel Ratio
tracking
Check procedure for the Gantry rotating mechanism (bend, vibrations,
Gravity SAG (G-SAG)
etc.)
Aligns the X-ray tube focus to the FOV center and the Detector center
6 ISO Center Alignment
channel.
7 Filter Center Alignment Aligns the filter to the X-ray tube and the Detector.
Note1: G-SAG is performed if considered necessary.
Note2: If you are sure that some procedures do not have to be performed, in this case, the possible allowed pro-
cedure combination/order should be:
At site installation or X-ray tube replacement, perform 1 2 3 4 5 6 7.
At detector replacement, perform 4 5 6 7.
Note3: Z-axis mis-alignment has serious effect on an image quality for the Twin Detector system, as compared
to the single detector system. Therefor, the Detector position alignment, aperture position alignment, and
tube warm-up sequence at POR and BOW must be properly performed.
SYSTEM 4-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

Difference of POR Between Twin Detector and Single Detector
For POR of the Twin Detector system, the X-ray beam location after adjustment is determined by the initial position
of the Aperture and Detector (the center between A and B slices).
Therefore, the X-ray beam location adjusted by Film–less POR might be different from one by Film POR, but it is
no problem due to the fact that:
• A slight tilt of X-ray beam against Z-axis has little effect on an image quality.
• The Aperture and Detector are installed using the special tools shipped with the system to ensure reli-
able position and parallelism. (The single Detector does NOT require the aperture alignment tool.)
• During Filmless POR, the X-ray tube temperature is controlled by software so that the X-ray beam can
be exposed at a certain location of the detector. (The single Detector does NOT control the X-ray tube
temperature.)
4-2 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD !
IN THIS ‘X-RAY ALIGNMENT’, GANTRY COMPONENTS ARE ADJUSTED AND SCANS ARE
PERFORMED. ALWAYS SWITCH OFF THE ‘CB3’ SWITCH BEFORE SERVICING OR
ADJUSTING THE GANTRY. ALSO VERIFY THAT NO PEOPLE ARE IN THE SCAN ROOM
WHENEVER A SCAN IS PERFORMED.

Requirements
The critical components for X-ray Alignment are all mounted directly to the rotating Gantry; they are:
• X-ray tube
BRIVO CT325
• Collimator (includes a bow-tie filter and an adjustable beam defining exit slit)
• Detector
Tools and materials required for x-ray alignment:
• Detector alignment tool
• Aperture alignment tool
• G-SAG pin (attached on the bottom of the collimator)
Gantry Geometry
Gantry geometrical direction definitions:
THETA THETA
THETA - Tangent to Gantry rotation.

Clockwise (+)
Counterclockwise (-)
X-ray Tube, Collimator, Detector
Zero degrees (HOME) 6 o’clock
Z-Axis - Parallel to the axis of Gantry rotation.

Toward the Table (-)
Away from the Table (+)
Z-Axis
X-ray Tube, Detector
SYSTEM 4-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-2 DETECTOR POSITION ALIGNMENT

This procedure keeps constant the distance between the Z–axis adjusting nut (left, center, and right) for the Detector
and Detector support plate so that the Detector can be installed parallel and at a predefine distance (12mm) with the
Gantry bearing surface.
Special Equipment
• Detector Alignment Tool
1. Preparation:
3. Rotate the Gantry until the DAS Assy reaches the 6 o’clock position by hand.
4-4 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-2 DETECTOR POSITION ALIGNMENT(CONTINUED)

4. Remove the flexible cable cover by unscrewing its 4 screws and 2 nuts from the DAS.

Nut (x2)

Flexible Cable
Cover
BRIVO CT325
Screw (x4)
5. Loosen the two mounting screws and a locking screw. (Do NOT remove them.)
Illustration 4-2 Detector Locking Screws
Mounting Screw
Detector
SYSTEM 4-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-2 DETECTOR POSITION ALIGNMENT(CONTINUED)

6. Using the Detector Adjustment Tool, set the distance between the Z-axis adjustment nut and detector support
plate to the so that it is the same one as the thickness of the tool.
Illustration 4-3 Detector Alignment Tool
7. Tighten the three detector locking screws securely.

8. Proceed to Section 4-3, ‘Aperture Position Alignment’.
4-6 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-3 APERTURE POSITION ALIGNMENT (Only for Brivo CT325)

This procedure keeps constant the distance and parallelism between the aperture and Gantry bearing surface.
Special Equipment
• Aperture Alignment Tool

BRIVO CT325
1. Preparation:
3. Rotate the Gantry until the Aperture Assy reaches the 6 o’clock position by hand.
SYSTEM 4-7
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-3 APERTURE POSITION ALIGNMENT(CONTINUED)

4. Set the collimator to the initial position.
a. Switch ON ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
b. Select Service  Diagnostics  Offline Scan  T/G Control.
c. Set Collimator Control:
Auto Collimator: OFF, Position Change: ON, Move mode: Rel., Reset: ON
d. Click on OK. Verify that the aperture stepping motor rotates.
4-8 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

6. Loosen the following nuts and screws of the aperture Assy. (Do NOT remove them.)
Illustration 4-4 Loose Nuts and Screws of the Aperture
Nut(x4)

BRIVO CT325
Screw (x3)
SYSTEM 4-9
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

7. Set the Aperture alignment tool in between the Gantry bearing and aperture Assy.
8. While pressing the Aperture Assy against the aperture alignment tool, tighten the aperture nuts and screws
gradually in the order shown in the photograph below.
Torque: Nut (x4) - 31Kgf.cm
Screw (x3) - 16Kgf.cm
9. Remove the Aperture alignment tool.
Illustration 4-5 Aperture Alignment Tool

Aperture Alignment Tool
2 7
PUSH 6
5 4
10. Proceed to Section 4-4, ‘Plane Of Rotation’.
4-10 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-4 PLANE OF ROTATION

This procedure checks and adjusts the plane of rotation of the x-ray fan beam until it is perpendicular to the axis of
Gantry rotation within 0.75 mm.
The Filmless POR is performed for the dual slice system.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
Do not remove the bow-tie filter during POR for the dual slice system.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Preparation:

BRIVO CT325
2. Switch ON the ‘CB2’, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU
NOTICE
3. Select Service  Calibration  Automated Alignment  POR Alignment.
4. Click on OK to enter the POR program.
5. Click on Confirm to enter warm up scan sequence.
6. Click on Confirm in the Service Scan Window.
The warm up scans start, then air scans automatically start.
7. The tube travel appears on the screen. If the following message appears, you can complete the POR proce-
dures.
******************************* Displayed *******************************
Tube is Aligned within tolerance.
For Accuracy
Move Tube x.xxx mm (x.xxxx inch) FWD.
***************************************************************************
a. Rotate the Gantry until the Tube reaches the 12 o’clock (home) position by hand.
b. Switch OFF the ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.
d. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for Z-Axis; note that there are two Z-Axis nuts for adjustment. (See Illustration
4-6)
screen.
SYSTEM 4-11
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

i. Switch ON the ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.
j. Return to Step 3.
Mounting Bolt (x4)
Rear Front
t
gh
Ri
ft
Le

Note

4-12 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-5 DETECTOR BEAM-ON-WINDOW

For Detector Z-Axis alignment of the dual slice system, high accuracy is required for geometric position between X-
ray beam and detector. Detector is aligned so that each detector channel (A-ch and B-ch) counts becoming same.
This Filmless Detector Z-Axis alignment require a scan to the user, and calculates ratio of counts between A side
and B side on 3 area (left, center, right). The ratio is converted to tolerance of detector (mm) and displayed. The
user move detector and retry BOW.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 

Do not remove the bow-tie filter during BOW for the dual slice System.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Preparation:
BRIVO CT325
d. Switch ON the ‘CB2’, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
NOTICE
2. Select Service  Calibration  Automated Alignment  BOW Alignment.
3. Click on OK to enter the BOW program.
4. Click on Confirm to enter warm up scan sequence.
The warm up scans start, then air scans automatically start.
6. The detector travel appears on the screen. If the following message appears, you can complete the BOW pro-
cedures.

******************************* Displayed *******************************
Detector is Aligned within tolerance.
***************************************************************************
b. Switch OFF the ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
4-7)
SYSTEM 4-13
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Illustration 4-7 Beam-on-Window Adjustment
Mounting Screw
(Allen Head)
Z-Axis
Adjustment Nut
Detector
Detector
Pin
Locking Screw
(Allen Head)
Z-Axis
Adjustment Nut
Detector Detector
Support Plate
e. Adjust the Detector position by turning the adjustment nut(s) by the amount instructed on the monitor
screen.
• Formula: x.xxxx mm / 0.75 mm = xx turn of adjustment nut (one turn: approximately 0.75mm shift)
Counterclockwise; FWD, toward the Table
Clockwise; BWD, away from the Table
• Specification: Detector Left, less than 0.072 mm
Detector Center, less than 0.076 mm
Detector Right, less than 0.072 mm
• Tighten the two mounting screws and a locking screws.
f. Switch ON the ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
g. Return to Step 2.
8. Proceed to Section 4-6, ‘Qcal Channel Ratio’ .
4-14 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-6 QCAL CHANNEL RATIO

This calibration must be performed just after completion of Filmless BOW.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
Do not remove the bow-tie filter during Q-cal Channel Ratio.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the BOW procedure.

BRIVO CT325
NOTICE
2. Select Service  Calibration  Automated Alignment  Qcal Channel Ratio.
3. Click on OK to enter the Qcal channel ratio program.
The scans start, then calibration automatically starts.
SYSTEM 4-15
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-7 GRAVITY SAG

1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Detector Beam-on-Window’
procedure.
NOTICE
2. Select Gravity SAG, refer to below:
Service  Calibration  Gravity SAG

3. Within the Gravity SAG window, click on Confirm and press the <Start scan> button to perform air scans
automatically.
4. After completing air scans, the following message diaplays:
******************************* Displayed *******************************
Set pin of center to aperture and press <Confirm> and <Start Scan> to start
scan.
5. Install the G-SAG pin:
a. Rotate the Gantry manually in the CW direction until the x-ray tube is positioned at the bottom.
b. Move the G-SAG pin into the position shown in Illustration 4-8.
Illustration 4-8 Installing G-SAG Pin
(Original Position) (Moved)
SAG Pin
BOTTOM VIEW OF THE COLLIMATOR
4-16 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-7 GRAVITY SAG (CONTINUED)

6. Click on Confirm and press the <Start scan> button to perform G-SAG PIN scans automatically.
G-SAG calculation is automatically performed and its result is displayed.

BRIVO CT325
7. If the Gravity SAG data is out of specifications, verify that the detector mounting bolts and x-ray tube mounting
bolts are correctly torqued, and then perform this ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure again.
8. Replace the G-SAG pin to the original position. (See illustration 4-8)
9. Proceed to Section 4-9, ‘ISO Center Alignment’, if you performed ths‘Detector Beam-on-Window’ procedure
prior to this ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure; or you do not perform ‘ISO Center Alignment’ or ‘Filter Center Alignment’,
please perform the following:
10. Installed the bow-tie filter.
SYSTEM 4-17
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-8 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT

This ‘ISO Center Alignment’ aligns the x-ray tube focus to the FOV center and the Detector center channel.
Illustration 4-9 ISO Center Adjustment
Adjust
X-ray
Tube
Focus
Center of FOV
CH1
Detector
Center Channel:
342.75 + 0.02 CH
Note
Within the ‘Automated Alignment’ menu (Service  Calibration  Automated Alignment), you do
not have to perform the following menus:
‘Tube Rough ISO Alignment’
‘Radial Alignment’
These are performed at the GEHW factory only.
1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Detector Beam-on-Window’ or ‘Gravity
SAG’ procedure.
4-18 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
NOTICE
2. Select Tube ISO Alignment, refer to below:
Service  Calibration  Automated Alignment  Tube ISO Alignment

Perform air and pin scans, following the instructions displayed on the monitor screen.

Note
Attach a steel pin to the phantom holder at a position approximately 5 cm away from the scan axis
center, as shown in Illustration 4-10.
BRIVO CT325
Illustration 4-10 Pin Scan
SYSTEM 4-19
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

3. Check that the calculated ISO Center Channel data is within a specification.
If the Mean Value is out of specification (342.75  0.02), perform the following steps, then follow the instructions
a. Adjust the x-ray tube Theta (tangential) position:
ii. Switch OFF the ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
iii. Loosen the 4 mounting bolts and 2 support bolts. (see illustration 4-6)
iv. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for THETA; note that there are two THETA nuts for adjustment.
v. Loosen the nuts that faces the direction in which you want to shift the tube.
vi. Adjust the x-ray tube position by turning the adjustment nuts by the amount instructed on the monitor
screen.
vii. Tighten the nuts previously loosened in step v.
viii. Tighten the 4 mounting bolts and 2 support bolts. (Torque: 280 kgf.cm)
ix. Switch ON the ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
4. Proceed to Section 4-9, ‘Filter Center Alignment’.
4-20 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-9 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT
Procedures
This ‘Filter Center Alignment’ aligns the filter to the x-ray tube and the Detector.
X-ray (Fixed)
Tube

Focus
Center of Filter
Adjust
BRIVO CT325
Filter
Ch1
Detector (Fixed)
Filter Center Ch.: 342.75 + 0.3
VIEW FROM TABLE

1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘ISO Center Alignment’ procedure.
SYSTEM 4-21
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
NOTICE
2. Select Bowtie Filter Alignment, refer to below:
Service Menu  Calibration  Automated Alignment  Bowtie Filter Alignment

Perform air and filter scans, following the instructions displayed on the monitor screen.
3. Check that the calculated Filter Center Channel data is within a specification:
If the Average Value is out of specification (342.75  0.3), perform the following steps, then follow the
instructions displayed on the monitor screen.
4-22 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

a. Adjust the filter Theta (tangential) position:
ii. Loosen the two bolts indicated in illustration 4-13.
iii. Rotate the adjustment screw to shift the filter for the amount instructed on the monitor screen.
One turn 1 mm filter shift.

Illustration 4-13 Filter Center Adjustment
BRIVO CT325
Loosen these Bolts
Adjustment
Screw
Collimator with Front Cover Removed
iv. Tighten the two bolts loosened in step ii.

SYSTEM 4-23
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-10 RADIAL ALIGNMENT

Note
The radial alignment is rarely performed. Only when loosening the detector locking screws (see
Illustration 4-15), this must be performed.
Prerequisite
• Radial Alignment Tool : 2234059
1. Preparation:
e. Rotate the Gantry (Tube) to the 12 o‘clock (home) position.
g. Remove the Flexible Cable Cover from the DAS assy. (See Illustration 4-1)
h. Switch ON the ‘CB4‘ and ‘XG Power’ switches.
NOTICE
2. Select Radial Alignment, refer to below:
Service Menu  Calibration  Automated Alignment  Radial Alignment

Perform air and tool scans, following the instructions displayed on the monitor screen.
(Attachment of the Radial Alignment Tool is as shown in illustration 4-14 (A).)
Repeat the above scans for the other tool attachment to obtain calculated Radial Alignment data.
(Attachment of the Radial Alignment Tool is as shown in illustration 4-14 (A’).)
4-24 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Illustration 4-14 Radial Alignment Tool

Radial Alignment Tool
BRIVO CT325
A'
3. Check that an average of the 2 calculated Radial Alignment data is within a specification.
If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the Radial Alignment tool.
b. Install a Dial Indicator on the side of the Detector using an attachment tool.
c. Loosen the two mounting screws and a locking screw.
d. Refer to the Average Value, rotate the Detector in the specified distance and direction.
e. Tighten the mounting screws and the locking screw.
• Screws Torque: 11 Nm (117 kgf.cm)
f. Remove the Dial Indicator with attachment tool.
g. Repeat the Radial Alignment procedure, to verify the adjustment.
SYSTEM 4-25
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Illustration 4-15 Install the Dial Indicator
Mounting Screw_Right
Dial Indicator
Locking Screw
Detector
Attachment Tool
Mounting Screw_Left
4. Perform the following alignment:
• ISO Center Alignment
• Filter Center Alignment
4-26 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 5 - SYSTEM CALIBRATION
NOTICE

for 48 hours.
5-1 GENERAL
NOTICE
If customer has the asymmetric scan option, please confirm it was installed before system
calibration, otherwise redo system calibration.
This ‘System Calibration’ describes the following check/calibrations/adjustment:
• Converter Amplifier Linearity Check (by performing x-ray exposures)
• Hilight Calibration; consisting of the following:
Q Calibration (Q-cal)
AV Calibration (AV-cal)
DG Calibration (DG-cal)
• Spectral Calibration
• CT Number Adjustment
The above calibrations and adjustment should be performed if any of the following replacements and/or system
adjustments are performed since the last calibrations/adjustment.
‘Converter Amplifier Linearity Check’ may be performed before calibrations/adjustment.
• X-ray tube replacement
• Detector replacement
• DAS or Converter Board replacement
• Collimator or Filter replacement
• Plane of rotation alignment
• Detector beam-on-window alignment
• ISO center alignment.
• Filter center alignment
SYSTEM 5-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

The following table shows that which Hilight calibration (Q-cal, AV-cal or DG-cal) should be performed for the above
occasions and also the calibration/adjustment order to be followed.
Detector Plane of rotation

replaced or
Calibration/ X-ray tube or or #6 Converter
Detector Converter
Adjustment Collimator or Iso center or DAS Board (at the
beam-on- Board
Order Filter Filter center replaced right end) re-
window replaced
 replaced alignment placed
alignment performed
performed
1 (only for Q-cal Channal Q-cal Channal Q-cal Channal Ra- - - Q-cal Channal
Brivo CT325) Ratio Ratio tio Ratio
2 Q-cal Q-cal Q-cal DG-cal Spectral Cal Spectral Cal
CT Number CT Number
3 AV-cal Spectral Cal Spectral Cal Spectral Cal Adjust Adjust
CT Number CT Number
4 Spectral Cal CT Number Adjust - -
Adjust Adjust
CT Number
5 - - -
Adjust.
6 - - - - -
Required Phantoms
Use the following phantoms (furnished with each system) during system calibrations/adjustment.
Make sure they are clean and contrast-free.
Phantom Part Number

Quality Assurance Phantom (QA Phantom)
46-241852G1
(See Illustration 5-1)
Illustration 5-1 QA Phantom
QA Phantom
5-2 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
5-2 HILIGHT CALIBRATION
5-2-1 General
This Hilight calibration should be performed prior to the Spectral Air and Phantom Calibrations; and the Spectral Air
and Phantom Calibrations should be performed if once the Hilight calibration is performed.
The x-ray tube must be sufficiently cool (the tube case temperature must be below 10 % heat level).
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARDS! SOME HILIGHT CALIBRATIONS ROTATE THE GANTRY (SEE THE

TABLE BELOW). WHEN HILIGHT CALIBRATION IS PERFORMED WITHOUT THE GANTRY
COVERS INSTALLED, ALWAYS MAKE SURE THAT NO PERSON IS IN THE SCAN ROOM.
Hilight Calibration Does gantry rotate?

Yes (The Gantry rotates during warm-up sequence,
Q-CAL
but stops during data acquisition sequence.)
AV-CAL No
Yes (The Gantry rotates during warm-up sequence,
DG-CAL but stops during data acquisition sequence.)
5-2-2 Q Calibration
The focus position of the x-ray tube shifts with temperature change. It will consequently shift the x-ray beam position
along the Z-axis. In this calibration, the following scans are automatically performed:
• six scans (Thickness: (0.6), 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 and 10 mm) (when the x-ray tube is cold)
• warm-up scans
• six scans (Thickness: (0.6), 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 and 10 mm) (when the x-ray tube is hot)
This calibration takes approximately 10 minutes.
1. Preparation:
NOTICE
2. Select Q-CAL, refer to below:
Service  Calibration  Service Calibration  Q Cal

Note
The bow-tie filter must be removed during Q calibration .

3. Follow the procedure that appears on the monitor screen.
SYSTEM 5-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
5-2-3 AV Calibration
The light emission of the Lumex Crystal persists after the x-ray radiation stops. This phenomenon is called ‘After
Glow.’ This procedure creates a file called After Glow Vector, used to compensate the After Glow.
1. Preparation:
NOTICE
2. Select AV-CAL, refer to below:
Service  Calibration  Service Calibration  AV Cal

5-2-4 DG Calibration
If some scans are performed with the same conditions but with different scan times, the CT numbers may not be the
same for these scans. This is due to Converter Board gain changes caused by different scan times. The DG
calibration reduces the CT number changes.
1. Preparation:
NOTICE
2. Select DG Cal; refer to below:
Service  Calibration  Service Calibration  DG Cal

5-4 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
5-3 SPECTRAL CALIBRATION
Precondition
• The bow-tie filter should be installed.
Illustration 5-2 Phantom Holder

7cm 4cm ISO Center
4cm (Small) - Set the QA phantom 40mm left from ISO center.
7cm (Large) - Set the QA phantom 70mm left from ISO center.
1. Select Service  Calibration  Service Calibration  AutoSequence1 (Spectral Air Cal  Spectral
Phantom Cal).
Note
For water scan, align laser beams of the positioning lights onto the reference lines of the QA phan-
tom, then move the cradle about 130mm toward the Gantry.
2. Click OK on the screen to select all the calibration stations.
3. Follow the instructions displayed on the monitor screen.
4. Proceed to the ‘CT Number Adjustment’ procedure.
SYSTEM 5-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
5-4 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT

The following Notes are for Brivo CT325:
Note
The followings are displayed in the result screen.
A: A channel, B: B channel, F: Fused scan (for the system with asymmetric scan option installed
only)
Note
For the system with the asymmetric option only, the CT # value displayed is the original one. Note
that the updated data is NOT displayed.
Perform this <CT Number Adjustment> after completing the Spectral Air Calibration and Spectral Phantom
Calibrations.
In addition, if you have any doubt whether the CT numbers of the phantom are good or not, perform the CT Number
Adjustment. This adjustment modifies the CT numbers of the 43 cm CAL files until water has a CT number equal
to zero and air has a CT number equal to -1000.
It takes approximately several minutes to complete this adjustment.
Note
The CT# of water will change according to its temperature by a factor of -0.4/C.
1. Select Service Calibration  CT Number Adjustment .
Note
For water scan, align laser beams of the positioning lights onto the reference lines of the QA phan-
tom, then move the cradle about 130mm toward the Gantry.
2. Follow the procedure that appears on the monitor screen.
(Select all kV)
Note
If you do not click on OK in the scan confirm screen within 15 minutes, Time-out occures.
3. Verify that the water CT # and air CT # equal 0  3 and -1000  5 respectively.
5-6 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
5-4 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT (CONTINUED)
Table 5-4 Air and Water CT Number (FOV : 25 cm) for Brivo CT315
Series No. 1 Series No. 4

Acquisition kV Thickness Air CT Number mA Water CT
No. (mm) Number
1 120 10 100

2 120 7 100
3 120 5 100
4 120 3 160
5 120 2 160
6 120 1 160
7 140 10 100
8 140 7 100
9 140 5 100
10 140 3 100
11 140 2 160
12 140 1 160
Scan Parameters Scan Parameters
Time : 3 sec Time : 2 sec
mA : 60mA mA : See above.
ROI Size (Box) : ROI Size (Box) :
1.00 cm (W) x 24.0 cm (H) 6.0 cm (W) x 6.0 cm (H)
SYSTEM 5-7
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Table 5-5 Air and Water CT Number (FOV : 43 cm) for Brivo CT315
Series No. 1 Series No. 4

Acquisition Thickness
kV Water CT
No. (mm) Air CT Number mA
Number
1 120 10 100
2 120 7 100
3 120 5 100
4 120 3 160
5 120 2 160
6 120 1 160
7 140 10 100
8 140 7 100
9 140 5 100
10 140 3 100
11 140 2 160
12 140 1 160
Time: 3 sec Time: 2 sec
mA: 60mA mA: see above.
ROI Size (Box): ROI Size (Box):
2.00 cm (W) x 48.0 cm (H) 6.0 cm (W) x 6.0 cm (H)
5-8 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Table 5-6 Air and Water CT Number for Brivo CT325
Thickness (mm) Series No. 1 Series No. 4

Acquisition
kV Water CT
No. A B Air CT Number mA
Number
1 120 0.6 0.6 200
2 120 1 1 200

3 120 2 2 200
4 120 3 3 200
5 120 5 5 200
6 120 7 7 200
7 120 10 10 200
8 120 1 6 200
9 140 0.6 0.6 160
10 140 1 1 160
11 140 2 2 160
12 140 3 3 160
13 140 5 5 160
14 140 7 7 160
15 140 10 10 160
16 140 1 6 160
Time: 3 sec Time: 2 sec
mA: 60mA mA: see above.
ROI Size (Box): ROI Size (Box):
2.00 cm (W) x 48.0 cm (H) 6.0 cm (W) x 6.0 cm (H)
SYSTEM 5-9
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
5-10 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 6 - IMAGE PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
6-1 GENERAL
This ‘Image Performance Verification’ contains tables of scan techniques and specifications for evaluating image
performance.
General Requirements
SECTION 6 - IMAGE PERFORMANCE

Perform the following before continuing:
1. Verify that system calibration (Hilight calibration, air and phantom calibrations, and CT Number Adjustment)
has been completed.
All image performance scans must use calibration data that are less than eight hours old.
VERIFICATION
2. Warm up the system at least two hours (minimum) prior to data collection.
Required Phantoms
Use the following phantoms (furnished with each system) during image performance verification.
Make sure they are clean and contrast-free.
• Quality Assurance (QA) Phantom
SYSTEM 6-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
6-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE

1. Acquire the scans listed in Table 6-1.
Select ‘Abdomen,’ or any anatomy of interest for ‘Infant.’
The phantoms to be scanned should be centered.
2. For each slice, verify the following:
• Visually check each image for rings, bands, streaks, shadings or artifacts near the image center.
• Position a circular ROI at the locations listed below (see also Illustration 6-1) and write down the data on
Table 6-2 and 6-3.
- Mc-Mean CT number of a center ROI.
- SD-Standard deviation of a center ROI.
- Mo-Mean CT number of a ROI 10 cm off center (Y = 0).
• The following ROI sizes (area) are used to measure ROI data.
FOV ROI AREA

25 cm 674.11 mm2
43 cm 1994.30 mm2
• To display a ROI data;

a.Position a cursor (here, a circle cursor).
b.Press the [ROI] key.
• Verify that the data falls within the specifications shown in Table 6-2 and 6-3.
Note
The CT# of water will change according to its temperature by a factor of -0.4/C.
High Contrast Spatial Resolution and Artifact Check Using QA (Quality Assurance) Phantom
3. The 1.0 mm pattern (see Illustration 6-2) must be clearly visible by the following techniques:
Table 6-1 Scan List
Kind of Scan SFOV DFOV kV Time mA THK Interval Recon

(cm) (cm) (sec) (mm) (mm)
Axial Head 25 10 120 2.0 150 10 - PFRM
Helical Head 25 10 120 2.0 150 10 10 PFRM
Axial Large 43 10 120 1.5 130 10 - PFRM
Helical Large 43 10 120 1.5 130 10 10 PFRM
Check if any artifact is observed on the image or not.
6-2 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
6-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
Illustration 6-1 ROI Locations
+Y ROI Circle
(Area of 674.11 mm2 or 1994.30 mm2)
Image

-X +X
Mc (0.0 cm)
Mo (10.0 cm)
VERIFICATION
SD (0.0 cm)
-Y
Illustration 6-2 QA Phantom
1.0 mm Pattern
SYSTEM 6-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
6-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

The 46-241852G1 Quality Assurance (QA) Phantom is used by both the customers and service people to assess
image quality in accordance with BRH requirements (21CFR, Section 1030 33). Use of this phantom is described
in the Operator’s Manual.
The operator’s manual instructs customers to perform QA checks on a daily basis. Service persons, however, shall
perform QA checks after any of the following events has occurred:
• System installation
• X-ray tube replacement
• Detector replacement
• Periodic maintenance.
Note
The service person shall complete all of the procedures in the Operator’s Manual.
6-4 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Table 6-2 Image Performance Check
For Brivo CT315

PTM FOV*1 kV TIME mA THK SPECIFICATION DATA Description
(cm) (sec) (mm) MC SD MO MC SD MO
Water part of
QA Phantom
Large 120 1 200 10 04 <4 MC  3
Water part of Large 120 1 20 10 - < 15 -

QA Phantom
Water part of
QA Phantom
Large 140 1 160 10 04 <4 -
Water part of
QA Phantom
Small 120 1 200 10 04 < 5.5 MC  2

Water part of Small 120 1 20 10 - < 20 -
QA Phantom
Water part of
QA Phantom
Small 120 1.5 190 7 04 < 5.5 -
VERIFICATION
Water part of
QA Phantom
Small 120 2 200 5 04 < 5.5 -
Water part of
QA Phantom
Small 120 3 200 3 04 <6 -
Water part of
QA Phantom
Small 120 3 200 2 04 <8 -
Water part of
QA Phantom
Small 120 5 200 1 04 <9 -
Water part of
QA Phantom
Small 140 1 40 10 04 < 10 -
Water part of Small 120 1.5 150 10 - < 3.5 - Axial scan
QA Phantom
Water part of Small 120 1.5 150 10 - < 3.5 - Helical scan
QA Phantom
Water part of Small 120 2 200 10 - <6 -
QA Phantom
*1: Large: 43 cm - Set the water part of QA phantom 70mm left from ISO center.
Small: 25 cm - Set the water part of QA phantom 40mm left from ISO center.
SYSTEM 6-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Table 6-3 Image Performance Check
For Brivo CT325

PTM FOV*1 kV TIME mA THK Mode SPECIFICATION DATA Description
(cm) (sec) (mm) 1i mode 2i mode
A B |Delta SD
(A–B)| ratio
MC SD MC SD MC SD MC SD
(A/B)
Water part of Large 120 1.5 140 10 2i 04 < 5.0 04 < 5.0 5 1 ± 0.1
QA Phantom
Water part of Large 120 1.5 140 10 1i 04 < 5.5 -
QA Phantom
Water part of Large 120 1.5 200 7 2i 04 < 5.0 04 < 5.0 5 1 ± 0.1
QA Phantom
Water part of Large 140 1.5 120 10 2i 04 04 5
QA Phantom
QA Phantom
QA Phantom
QA Phantom
QA Phantom
QA Phantom
Water part of Large 120 1.5 100 1 2i 0±4 0±4 5
QA Phantom
Water part of Large 140 1.5 40 10 1i 04
QA Phantom
QA Phantom
QA Phantom
Water part of Large 140 1.5 100 2 1i 0±4
QA Phantom
6-6 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Table 6-3 Image Performance Check (Continued)
For Brivo CT325

PTM FOV*1 kV TIME mA THK Mode SPECIFICATION DATA Description
(cm) (sec) (mm) 1i mode 2i mode
A B |Delta SD
MC SD MC SD MC SD (A–B)| ratio MC SD
(A/B)
Water part of Small 120 1.5 140 10 2i 04 < 5.5 04 < 5.5 5 1 ± 0.1
QA Phantom
Water part of Small 120 1.5 140 10 1i 04 < 5.5
QA Phantom
Water part of Small 120 1.5 40 10 2i 04 04 5

QA Phantom
QA Phantom
QA Phantom
VERIFICATION
QA Phantom
Water part of Small 120 1.5 90 2 2i 0±4 0±4 5
QA Phantom
Water part of Small 120 1.5 100 1 2i 0±4 0±4 5
QA Phantom
Water part of Small 140 1.5 40 10 1i 04
QA Phantom
QA Phantom
QA Phantom
Water part of Small 140 1.5 100 2 1i 0±4
QA Phantom
SYSTEM 6-7
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
blank
6-8 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 7 - SYSTEM LEVEL SAFETY TESTS
WARNING
POTENTIAL FOR SHOCK.
GROUND WIRES WILL HAVE GROUND CURRENT PRESENT WITH POWER “ON”. FOLLOW
APPROPRIATE SAFETY PROCEDURES FOR WORKING WITH AN ENERGIZED SYSTEM.
NOTICE
SECTION 7 - SYSTEM LEVEL

Follow ALL required safety and PPE procedures customary for your organization, when
working on this product.
SAFETY TESTS
7-1 PATIENT TOUCH LEAKAGE TEST
This test should ensure that a patient undergoing a scan cannot touch or otherwise contact any conductive surfaces.
Complete this procedure after the installation of all options.
7-1-1 Personnel Requirements

One (1) Field Engineer for 10 minutes preparation and 20 minutes operation procedure.
7-1-2 Tools and Test Equipment
Item Qty
Standard service tool kit 1
Dale 600/601 Meter (from tool pool)* 1
Dale extended length leads* 1
*: GE Healthcare performed validation of this procedure using the Dale 600/601
meter (or equivalent equipment). Due to the unique nature of this meter, GE can-
not guarantee the accuracy of this procedure if you use another meter.
7-1-3 Required Conditions

• Only trained service personnel should service the GE Scanner.
• GE Healthcare performed validation of this procedure using the Dale 600/601 meter ONLY. GE cannot
guarantee the accuracy of this procedure if you use another meter.
• You must remove the Table Front Bottom Cover.
SYSTEM 7-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
7-1-4 Test Conditions

• Test to cover ALL points in an envelope described by Table travel from mimimum to maximum extension,
including the Table extender.
• Test from both the head and foot of the Table -- e.g., test assuming that a patient may lie either HEAD-
FIRST or FEET-FIRST.
• Test to ensure that all conductive surfaces are 6 feet (1.9m) below and 7 feet (2.1m) above the Table
surface -- e.g., test assuming that a patient may lie either FACE-DOWN or FACE-UP and can touch or
contact conductive surfaces both above and below the table.
• Test to ensure that a protective envelope, free of ANY and ALL conductive surfaces, extends at least 6
feet (1.9m) around the patient. Surfaces of concern include:
- I.V poles and tray assemblies
- Smart step monitors and stands
- Table bearing rails, if accessible
- The A1 Disconnect
- The PDU
- All other conductive surfaces
6' (1.9m)
6'
(1
.9
m
)
Cradle (w/extender) Cradle in

fully extended Home position
6'
)
.9m
(1
.9
m
6' (1
7-2 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
7-1-5 Procedure
7-1-5-1 Cover Removal

Remove the Table Front Bottom Cover and the Gantry Left Side Cover.
7-1-5-2 Leakage Current Testing

Refer to the Dale 601 Operator’s Manual for instructions on the use of the Dale 600/601 Meter for measuring leakage
current or refer to Illustration 7-1 for a quick overview.
Illustration 7-1 Using the Dale 600/601 Meter to Measure Leakage Current

SAFETY TESTS
SYSTEM 7-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
7-1-5-2 Leakage Current Testing (Continued)

1. Plug the Dale 600/601 Meter into the outlet on the Gantry left side and confirm that the outlet is wired correctly
by observing the three LED indicators on the meter.
Note
Your meter must display a valid calibration sticker.
2. Connect the meter leads to the meter as follows:
a. Connect one end of the shorter black lead to the chassis plug and the other to the Table ground bus.
b. Connect the red or longer black test lead to the external plug on top of the Dale 600/601 meter.
Note
Some meters include a black lead and a red test lead, while other meters include two black leads.
If your meter includes two black leads, the longer black lead is the test lead.
3. Set the function switch on the Dale Meter to external and test that the meter is operational by touching the ex-
ternal lead to the meter’s test terminal.
4. Keep the shorter black lead connected to the Table base ground bus and connect the red lead or longer black
lead to the devices (components) under test, being sure to:
a. Test with the power ON.
b. Test between the system reference ground point (Table base) and the unit reference ground points.
c. Test all conductive surfaces and components within patient reach - within 6 feet (1.9m) of the Table, and
within 7 feet (2.1m) above the surface of the Table, measuring at Table maximum travels.
Note
At some sites, sinks and wall outlet cover plates may create areas of concern.
d. Test ALL optional components, such as in-room monitors, injectors, overhead monitor suspensions, and
Table options.
NOTICE
Beware of static discharge from the scan window, keypads, display, touch pads, and other
plastic surfaces.
5. Record the results of your tests in Table 7-1, making certain that no leakage current exceeds the following lim-
its:
• Critical care areas (invasive) - 10  a
• General care areas - 20  a (Use this test criterion)
• Not intended for patient area - 50  a
7-4 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
7-1-5 Leakage Current Testing (Continued)
Table 7-1 Test Result List
Gnd Bus to Install < 20  A

Any Table ground points within the 6’ range
Any Gantry ground points within the 6’ range
Boom-in-Room metal surface
Monitors or metal surface
Sink or metal surface

Installed Table accessories
Other
SAFETY TESTS
Other
6. Re-install the Table Front Bottom Cover and the Gantry Left Side Cover.
Procedure Hints
• Items with abnormally high or low measurements could indicate improper wiring, or loose or poor con-
nections due to corrosion, painted surfaces, etc.
• High leakage could indicate a wiring error such as a neutral connected to the ground.
• Fluctuating ground currents could indicate a short, poor connection, or facilities ground.
• Refer to the Illustration below for visual depictions of the required measurements.
Illustration 7-2 Measurement Points
7’
7’
7’ 7’
6’
6’
6’
6’
SYSTEM 7-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
7-2 CT SYSTEM CHASSIS LEAKAGE TEST

Unless required by your state, the CT System Chassis Leakage Test is an optional procedure.
DANGER
POTENTIAL FOR ELECTRIC SHOCK.
SERVICING HARDWARE WITH POWER “ON”.
EQUIPMENT SERVICE CAN ONLY BE PERFORMED SAFETY WITH THE MAIN
POWER “DISCONNECT” TAGGED AND LOCKED OUT.
7-2-1 Personnel Requirements

One (1) Field Engineer for 2 hours operation procedure or one (1) customer electrician for 2 hours operation proce-
dure.
7-2-2 Action List

2 hours labor on site, includes:
• Removal of covers
• Leakage test
• Re-installation of covers
• Recording of site data on the CT System Chassis Leakage Test Form, if required by your state. Forward
the completed form to your Project Manager of Installation.
7-2-3 Tools and Test Equipment
Item Qty
Standard service tool kit 1
Dale 600/601 Leakage Current Meter 1
GEH LOTO Kit 1
*: GE Healthcare performed validation of this procedure using the Dale 600/601
meter ONLY. Due to the unique nature of this meter, GE cannot guarantee the
accuracy of this procedure if you use another meter.
7-6 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
7-2-4 Required Conditions

• Only trained service personnel should service the GE Scanner.
• Servicing hardware with power “On” equipment service can only be performed safely with the main pow-
er “disconnect” Tagged and Locked Out.
• GE Healthcare performed validation of this procedure using the Dale 600/601 meter ONLY. GE cannot
guarantee the accuracy of this procedure if you use another meter.
• You must remove the Table Front Bottom Cover and Gantry Front and Both Side Covers.
7-2-5 PROCEDURE
NOTICE

Follow LOTO and other safety procedures found in this manual before starting this proce-
SAFETY TESTS
dure.
7-2-5-1 Cover Removal

1. Remove the Gantry Front and Side Covers.
2. Remove the Table Front Bottom Cover to gain access to the ground cables and ground bar.
Note
Do NOT disconnect ANY grounds at this time.
7-2-5-2 Electrical Connection Removal

1. Confirm that all system grounds are securely attached to the system ground bus and NOT the Table base.
2. Direct the electrician to remove all external electrical connections made during installation, including:
• Main system ground at PDU/Gantry
• Power feeder flex connection at PDU
• Room door interlocks and room warning light connections
• Any and all other external ground connections to the system.
3. Confirm the removal of all external gantry, table, console, and PDU connections, and have the electrician do
the same.
Note
Some wires, such as the room warning light, may have external power and wire nuts, which should
be installed to protect from arcing.
4. Replace all covers removed except for the Table Front Bottom Cover.
5. Follow the Lockout/Tagout procedure for re-energizing power and boot to application level. If not already done,
remove the Table Front Bottom Cover while the system boots.
SYSTEM 7-7
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
7-2-5-3 System Ground Wire Testing

1. Plug the Dale 600/601 Leakage Current Meter into one of the outlets on the gantry.
2. Connect the meter leads to the meter as follows:
a. Connect one end of the shorter black lead to the chassis plug and the other to he table ground bus.
b. Connect the red or longer black test lead to the external plug on top of the Dale 600/601 meter.
Note
Some meters include a black lead and a red test lead, while other metes include two black leads.
If your meter includes two black leads, the longer black lead is the test lead.
3. Set the function switch on the Dale 600/601 meter to external. Using the red or longer black external lead,
touch the meter’s test terminal to confirm that the meter is operational.
Note
For more information, refer to the Dale 600/601 operator’s Manual or see Illustration 7-1.
4. With the system at application level and all components functional, test the system ground wires as follwos:
• Set up the meter
• Connect the shorter black lead to the system ground bus
• Remove a system ground wire
• Connect the red or longer black lead to the ground wire
• Read the value on the meter
• Replace the system ground wire
• Record the results of your tests in the CT System Chassis Leakage Test Completion Form. (See Illus-
tration 7-3)
• Repeat, testing all system ground wires one-at-a time. The CT System Chassis Leakage Test Comple-
tion Form lists each system ground wire.
NOTICE
The measured leakage current must not exceed 5 mA in any ground wire.
7-8 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Illustration 7-3 System Ground Chassis Leakage Test Form
GE Form - System Ground Chassis Leakage Test

Customer Site Data
Where Installed
City State
Customer's Telephone Number Room No.
System ID # GON #
DVM Serial # Cal Due Date
Leakage Meter Manufacturer Model #
Serial # Cal Due Date
Installer’s Name: Company

SAFETY TESTS
This system was tested in accordance with NFPA 99: Standard for Health Care Facilities.
The measured leakage current must not exceed 5 MA in any ground wire.
Table Ground Bus Results Test Date Tester
Gantry ground wire

Table ground wire
PDU ground wire
Console ground wire
Options – If present
Boom in Room ground wire
(other)
(other)
(other)
This system was tested in accordance with NFPA 99 Sections 8.4.1.3.4.1, and 8.4.1.3.4.2:
Standard for Health Care Facilities.
All tests as listed above: Passed Failed
Return to: Project Manager of Installation
SYSTEM 7-9
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
7-2-5-4 System Power Down

1. After completing all tests, follow the Lockout/Tagout procedure to power down the system.
2. Direct the electrician to reinstall all electrical connections, conduits, cables and wires removed in section 7-2-
5-2 and to secure all connections per NEC code.
3. Check to confirm that all connections are securely tightened.
4. Reinstall all removed system covers, except for the gantry left side cover near the service switch panel.
7-2-5-5 System Power-Up and Test

Note
Be sure to complete this section of the procedure on site.
1. Follow the Lockout/Tagout procedure for re-energizing power.
2. Turn on the gantry service switches and power up the Console.
3. Check that no cables remain in the gantry rotating path.
4. Return cover dollies to storage areas.
5. Check that the table controls and footswitch function properly.
6. Re-test the system by completing a system functional scan. If installed, be sure to test the room warning light
and the door interlock also at this time.
7. Complete the CT System Chassis Leakage Test Completion Form, if required by your state, and forward the
completed form to your Project manager of installation.
7-10 SYSTEM
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
OPERATOR CONSOLE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - DVD-RAM DRIVE FUNCTION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 COMPUTER DVD-RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 INITIALIZING DVD MEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
SECTION 2 - OC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Table of Content
2-1 OC POWER-UP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2 MONITOR FUNCTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 KEYBOARD FUNCTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-4 AUDIO FUNCTION TEST (OUT VOICE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-5 MISC TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
i
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
ii
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 1 - DVD-RAM DRIVE FUNCTION CHECK
1-1 COMPUTER DVD-RAM
Mount and Un-mount Procedure

1. Insert the DVD-RAM into the DVD-RAM drive.
2. Open up a unix shell and type: mountDVD
3. To view the DVD contents, type: Is /DVD
4. If the DVD contents display, this function is ok.
SECTION 1 - DVD-RAM DRIVE

5. To remove the DVD-RAM from the DVD-RAM drive, first un-mount it by typing: unmountDVD.
FUNCTION CHECK
1-2 INITIALIZING DVD MEDIA
1. Open a unix shell and perform the following operation to initialize DVD-RAM on new media.
• mkfsDVD
2. Select ‘y’ for yes to process making system file.
OC 1-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
1-2 OC
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 2 - OC OPERATION
WARNING
2-1 OC POWER-UP SEQUENCE
The processor of the Operator Console starts with a power-on self test right after powered on, as follows:
• System disk test
• DVD-ROM test
• Raw data disk test
• DTB
• Scan Control Box
The test progress information is displayed on the monitor.
After the power-on test completes with no error occurred, the processor loads the OS and application software from
the hard disk into memory and starts the application software.
When no error is found in these processes, the start-up screen will be shown on the monitor.
If error occurs, the power-on test will stop and the test log window appears. You can confirm the problem by
reviewing test log, then select either of the following:
• [H/W diag (Shutdown] : Go to H/W diag Main Menu
(Refer to Diagnostics manual.)
OC 2-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-1 OC POWER-UP SEQUENCE (CONTINUED)
NOTICE
When the interactive test is completed, the system MUST be powered OFF ([Exit]  [OK]) to
avoid accidental X-ray Exposure. That is because system reboot can NOT activate the
system reset line.
• [Startup] : The error is skipped and the power-on sequence proceeds so that the start-up screen will be
shown on the monitor.
Note
When the start-up screen does NOT appear even if using the [Startup] command, the system must
be shutdown using [shutdown] button in the desktop menu.
• [Shutdown] : The system runs the shutdown sequence, resulting in the system powered OFF
automatically.
2-2 OC
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-2 MONITOR FUNCTION TEST

1. Select [Service]  [Diagnostics]  [H/W Diag (Shutdown)]  [Interactive Test]  [Monitor Test].
The monitor test screen appears.
2. To return to [Interactive Test Menu], click on [Back].
Note
To exit from [H/W Diag (Shutdown)] menu, the system must be rebooted so that the [Exit] button
must be used to shut down the system.
Color
3. Click on any color key (RED, GREEN, BLUE, WHITE, or BLACK).
The display color changes in the selected one.
4. Verify that no bad dots exits on the monitor display.
5. To exit from this test, press the left button of the mouse.
This operation returns to the monitor test screen.
Display Pattern
6. Click on any pattern key (Flat, Horizontal Gradation 1 or 2, or Vertical Gradation 1 or 2), then click on any color
key.
The display pattern changes in the selected one.
7. Adjust position, size, trapezoid, or parallelogram of the monitor.
(For adjustment, refer to Installation, Wiring and Power-ON.)
8. To exit from this test, press the left button of the mouse.
This operation returns to the monitor test screen.
Auto Sequence Test

This runs the mixing tests of color and display pattern described above automatically. To go to next test, press the
left button of the mouse.
OC 2-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-3 KEYBOARD FUNCTION TEST

1. Select [Service]  [Diagnostics]  [H/W Diag (Shutdown)]  [Interactive Test]  [Keyboard Test].
The keyboard test screen appears.
Note
Input Test
This test sends command from the keyboard to the screen (system).
3. Press any key on the keyboard.
4. Verify that the key on the screen related to the pressed key is highlighted.
LED ON/OFF/Flash Test

This test sends command from the screen (system) to the keyboard.
5. Select [Move to Scan], [Stop Move], [Start Scan], [Pause], [X-ray on], [Stop Scan] LED to Off/On/Flash status.
The related LED on SCB should really Off/On/Flash.
6. Select "All LEDs" to Off/On/Flash status, all LEDs on SCB should really Off/On/Flash.
103 Keyboard Test

7. Select [103 KB Test].
The keyboard test screen disappear, then the 103 Keyboard Test screen will appear.
8. Press any button on the keyboard.
9. Verify that the key on the keyboard screen related to the pressed key is highlighted.
10. Click on any place on the 103 keyboard test screen using the left button of the mouse to returns to the keyboard
test screen.
Note
The LEDs for Num Lock, Caps Lock, and Scroll Lock MUST be OFF before exiting from the 103
keyboard test. If it is not, it has significant impact on other tests.
2-4 OC
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-4 AUDIO FUNCTION TEST (OUT VOICE)

1. Select [Service]  [Diagnostics]  [H/W Diag (Shutdown)]  [Interactive Test]  [Audio Test].
The Audio test screen appears.
Note
Mic
Change the value of Mic by moving the slider and click Accept, the value of Mic will be set.
Volumn
Change the value of Volumn by moving the slider and click Accept, the value of Volumn will be set.
Record
Press the microphone on the Scan Control Box and start to speak close to the microphone, the record function will
be started.
Release the microphone on the Scan Control Box, click play voice Stop button on the Audio Test window, stop to
record.
Play
Click Play, it will play the voice recorded.
Close
Click Close to exit from the Auido Test window.
OC 2-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-5 MISC TEST

This includes the following tests:
• Hardware Inventory
• View SYSLOG
• Safety Loop ON/OFF
• Shutdown Test
1. Select [Service]  [Diagnostics]  [H/W Diag (Shutdown)]  [Interactive Test]  [Misc Test].
The Misc test selection window appears.
Note
Hardware Inventory
This program shows the hardware configuration of the Host Computer. This program runs “lhinv” command.
Note
When changing the hardware configuration (e.g. Memory addition, Disk change...), always run this
program to check if the system properly recognizes the hardware to be changed.
3. Click on [Hardware Inventory] from the Misc test selection window.
The list of hardware connected to the host computer appear.
4. Click on [Close] to return to the Misc test selection window.
View SYSLOG
This program displays system log information after last reboot.
5. Click on [View SYSLOG] from the Misc test selection window.
The system log information appears.
Note
The system log to be displayed shows only a day’s worth of log after last reboot. When the following
day comes, the log of the day before is saved on “messages” file, then it will be deleted from the
SYSLOG viewing window.
Note
8 day’s worth of log files are being saved as a backup on the directory “/var/log”. You can see them
using “ls” and “cat” commands. The log name is “boot.log”.
2-6 OC
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-5 MISC TEST (CONTINUED)
Safety Loop
This program can switch ON or OFF the relay for safety loop of the OC.
7. Click on [Safety Loop] from the Misc test selection window.
8. The message screen appears. Click on [OK] button.
The safety loop relay of the OC is in close position, so that OC safety loop is connected and the selector is ON.
9. Click on [Safety Loop] again to open the safety loop relay of the OC.
NOTICE
Before starting other test, the safety loop MUST return to the default setting by reboot sys-
tem.
Shutdown
This program shutdown the system.
11. Click on [Shutdown Test] from the Misc test selection window.
The system runs shutdown sequence automatically, then the system is down.
OC 2-7
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
2-8 OC
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
GANTRY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - DC POWER SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 24V DC POWER SUPPLY ON STATIONARY FRAME (5159097) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 POWER SUPPLY (FOR GDAS) ON ROTATIVE FRAME (5323970) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Table of Content
SECTION 2 - ROTATIONAL MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-1 CLEARANCE BETWEEN ROTATIONAL AND STATIONARY COMPONENTS . . . . . 2-1
2-2 ROTATION BALANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2-1 Rotation Balance for Non-EMC Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2-2 Rotation Balance for EMC Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-3 G. PULSE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-4 AZIMUTH BELT TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-5 HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-6 SLIP RING RADIAL POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
SECTION 3 - ROTATIONAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2 MOVEMENT CHECK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-3 ROTATION POSITION DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-4 ROTATION SPEED DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
SECTION 4 - SLIP RINGS AND BRUSHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 CAUTION AND NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-2 SIGNAL BRUSH CONTACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-3 SIGNAL AND POWER BRUSHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-3-1 Signal and Power Brush Wear (Erosion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-3-2 Cleaning of Brush Block Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-4 HSDCD SLIP RING CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-5 BRUSH DEBRIS CLEANING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
SECTION 5 - COLLIMATOR FOR BRIVO CT315 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5-1 APERTURE RATIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-2 BOW-TIE FILTER CURVE TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
SECTION 6 - COLLIMATOR FOR BRIVO CT325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-1 APERTURE RATIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-2 BOW-TIE FILTER CURVE TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-3 APERTURE Z-AXIS BELT TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
i
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 7 - TABLE AND GANTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7-1 TABLE POSITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-2 POSITIONING LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-3 GANTRY CONTROL PANEL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-3-1 Table In, Out, Fast Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-3-2 EXLMR Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-3-3 POSN Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
ii
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 1 - DC POWER SUPPLIES
WARNING
DON’T MANUALLY ROTATE THE GANTRY IF “SERVICE” SWITCH IS OFF STATE,
ESPECIALLY WHEN GANTRY IS POWERING ON.
1-1 24V DC POWER SUPPLY ON STATIONARY FRAME (5159097)
SECTION 1 - DC POWER SUPPLY

Illustration 1-1 24V DC Power Supply
24 VDC power supply
24 VDC power supply diagram
㪣
㪉㪉㪇㩷㪭㪘㪚㩷㫀㫅㫇㫌㫋㩷㪝㫉㫆㫄㩷㪧㪛㪬 Receiver
㪥
PS 㪉㪋㪭
Mux
㪉㪋㩷㪭㪛㪚㩷㫆㫌㫋㫇㫌㫋㩷㫋㫆㩷㪧㪛㪬
GANTRY 1-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-1 24V DC POWER SUPPLY ON STATIONARY FRAME (5159097) (CONTINUED)

Understand and follow the Safety Guidelines Manual.
1. Remove the left side cover.
2. Check DC power supply voltage (23.6V~24.8V).
a. Power on the Power Supply, if the power on indication light is lighted, it means this module is working, or
else check the power supply input, make sure whether the 220VAC input has been connected. If the power
on indication light can not be lighted, change another DC power supply module.
b. Measure the output voltage, see whether it is within the specification, or else adjust the V.ADJ nut until the
output voltage is within the specification. If the output voltage can not be adjusted to the specification,
please change another power supply module.
Illustration 1-2 Check and measure the 24V DC Power Supply
Output voltage adjust
Power on indication Measure output voltage
Power Supply input
1-2 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-2 POWER SUPPLY (FOR GDAS) ON ROTATIVE FRAME (5323970)

1. Remove the left side cover from the Gantry.
1. Switch OFF the ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
2. Remove the right side cover from the Gantry.
3. Rotate the Gantry to approximately 190 tube position by hand.
4. Insert the Azimuth lock pin.
5. Remove the Power Supply Cover by unscrewing six nuts. (See Illustration 1-3)

7. Measure if necessary, the potentiometers of the Power Supply according to the Table 1-1. The potentiometer
positions is shown in the Illustration 1-4.
Illustration 1-3 Power Supply Voltage Adjustment (5323970)
Nut (x6)
5V 24V RTN
Coll Power
1 4 7 10 Cable
24V
5V RTN 2 5 8 11
3 6 9 12
24V 24V RTN
OGP DC OUTPUT DAS Power OGP Power Cable

Cable
+5V_A 5V_L
RF XMT AND MUX

DC OUTPUT
1 4 7
AGND 2 5V RTN 24V 24V RTN
5 8
0V_A
3 6 9 24V RTN 2 3 24V
24V 1 2 24V RTN 1 4
ment - 5136907ADW_r1.pdf Page 2 of 2
GND
-5V_A
DAS DC OUTPUT COLLIMATOR AND TEMP RF XMT AND MUX DC OUTPUT
CTRL DC OUTPUT
GANTRY 1-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-2 POWER SUPPLY ON ROTATIVE FRAME (CONTINUED)
Illustration 1-4 Potentiometer Position of PS
Table 1-1 Power Supply Specifications (5323970)
No. Rated Out Voltage Voltage Range (without Load)

1 + 5V_L +5.10 +/-0.1V
2 + 5V_A +5.05 +/-0.1V
3 -5V_A -5.10 +/-0.1V
4 + 24V +24.10 +/-0.1V
1-4 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 2 - ROTATIONAL MECHANISM
WARNING
2-1 CLEARANCE BETWEEN ROTATIONAL AND STATIONARY COMPONENTS
SECTION 2 - ROTATIONAL
WARNING
MECHANISM
ROTATION HAZARD!
WHEN YOU PRESS THE ‘POSN LIGHT’ BUTTONS, THE GANTRY QUICKLY ROTATES TO
THE -14 DEG. POSITION. IF IT IS NECESSARY TO PLACE ANY PART OF YOURBODY INSIDE
OR NEAR THE GANTRY, SWITCH OFF THE ‘CB3’ SWITCH FIRST.
1. Preparation:
d. Switch ON the ‘CB2’ and Service switch.
2. Verify that the clearance between each rotating component part and fixed parts is more than 10mm, while
rotating the Gantry in the CW direction by hand.
Note
Ensure the minimum clearance between TGP mounting plate and gantry rotation parts are no less
than 6mm.
Illustration 2-1 Clearance Between TGP MNT Plate and Gantry Rotation
Gantry Rotation
TGP MNT Plate
No less than 6mm
3. Check to make sure that the cables does not catch on any stationary components during each revolution.
GANTRY 2-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-2 ROTATION BALANCE
Special Equipment
• Spring Balance (Fish Scale)
WARNING
MECHANICAL HAZARD!
FAILURE TO HOLD THE GANTRY USING THE AZIMUTH LOCK PIN PRIOR TO REMOVING
COMPONENTS MAY LEAD TO GANTRY MOTION WHICH CAN STRIKE A PERSON CAUSING
INJURY OR DEATH.
2-2-1 Rotation Balance for Non-EMC Gantry

1. Preparation:
Illustration 2-2 Gantry Balance Weight Locations
eight
Main W
gh t
Wei 6kg
x 6
Side 0.05
2
27 kgx
1.
(S)
x27 gx5 )
kg 0.5k gx7 (D
0.06
0.5k
)
7 (S
kgx1 )
0.06 gx9 (D
6 k
(S) 0.0
gx6 x1 (
S)
.06k 8kg 4 (D)
( S ) 0 + 1 .
x 2 8 x 1 k g x
kg g . 8
0.28 gx7 (D
) 1.9k x1 + 1
g
0.28
k 1.9k
Note: S - Single; D - Dual
2-2 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-2 ROTATION BALANCE (CONTINUED)

2. Perform the rough weight balance check/adjustment by observing the free movement:
a. Rotate the Gantry until the main weight (under the DAS Assy) reaches the 6 o’clock position.
b. Verify that the Gantry does not rotate on its own, due to unbalance.
If the Gantry rotates in the CW direction, increase the side weight.
If the Gantry rotates in the CCW direction, decrease the side weight.
c. Repeat above step until the Gantry is balanced.
d. Rotate the Gantry until the side weight reaches the 6 o’clock position.
e. Verify that the Gantry does not rotate on its own, due to unbalance.
If the Gantry rotates in the CW direction, decrease the main weight.
If the Gantry rotates in the CCW direction, increase the main weight.
MECHANISM
f. Repeat above step until the Gantry is balanced.
Illustration 2-3 Rough Weight Balance
CCW CW CCW CW
GANTRY 2-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

3. Perform the fine weight balance check/adjustment using a spring balance:
a. Rotate the Gantry until the main weight reaches the 12 o’clock position.
b. Measure the force (F1 and F2) required to initiate Gantry rotation by pulling the Gantry with a spring
balance.
If the value ( F2-F1 ) is positive, decrease the weight in the Side Weight. 
If the value is negative, increase the weight in the Side Weight.
c. Rotate the Gantry until the side weight reaches the 6 o’clock position.
d. Measure the force (F3 and F4) required to initiate Gantry rotation by pulling the Gantry with a spring
balance.
If the value ( F4-F3 ) is positive, decrease the weight in the Main Weight. 
If the value is negative, increase the weight in the Main Weight.
Illustration 2-4 Gantry Static Balance Force Measurements
F2
F1
F3
F4
2-4 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Table 2-1 Unbalance Force Measure
Side Weight Main Weight

Unbalance (kg) Adjust Outer Side W Unbalance (kg) Adjust Outer Center W
|F2-F1| (5330560) (pcs) |F4-F3| (5334418) (pcs)
0~0.5 - 0~0.5 -
0.5~1.0 1 0.6~1.6 1
1.0~1.7 2 1.8~2.6 2
1.7~2.4 3 2.8~3.8 3
MECHANISM
2.4~3.0 4 4.0~4.8 4
3.0~3.7 5
3.7~4.4 6
Note
If |F4-F3| can not be adjusted to be less than 0.5kg only by outest weight BLK, make value (F4-F3)
to keep positive, then step by step decrease inner center weight sheets (5336285) to make |F4-F3|
less than 0.5kg.
GANTRY 2-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-2-2 Rotation Balance for EMC Gantry

1. Preparation:
Illustration 2-5 Gantry Balance Weight Locations
Side Weight
N1 (0.45kg) N2 (0.45kg)
Front ADJ Rear ADJ Sheet
Sheet
(5351914)
(5351914)
N4 (0.31kg)
(5352535) N3 (0.34kg)
Front ADJ Rear ADJ Sheet
Sheet
(5372966)
INSTALL 5351914 TO THE BACK OF THE DAS MOUNT PLATE

WHEN N1 REACHES THE MAX NUMBER.
Main Weight
N1䖒ࠄ᳔໻ᅝ㺙᭄䞣ৢˈᇚ5351914㺙ࠄDAS MOUNT PLATE㚠䴶
INSTALL 5372966 TO THE BACK OF THE DAS MOUNT PLATE
WHEN N3 REACHES THE MAX NUMBER.
N3䖒ࠄ᳔໻ᅝ㺙᭄䞣ৢˈᇚ5372966㺙ࠄDAS MOUNT PLATE㚠䴶
2-6 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

2. Perform the rough weight balance check/adjustment by observing the free movement:
a. Rotate the Gantry until the main weight (under the DAS Assy) reaches the 6 o’clock position.
b. Verify that the Gantry does not rotate on its own, due to unbalance.
If the Gantry rotates in the CW direction, increase the side weight.
If the Gantry rotates in the CCW direction, decrease the side weight.
c. Repeat above step until the Gantry is balanced.
d. Rotate the Gantry until the side weight reaches the 6 o’clock position.
e. Verify that the Gantry does not rotate on its own, due to unbalance.
If the Gantry rotates in the CW direction, decrease the main weight.
If the Gantry rotates in the CCW direction, increase the main weight.
MECHANISM
f. Repeat above step until the Gantry is balanced.
Illustration 2-6 Rough Weight Balance
CCW CW CCW CW
GANTRY 2-7
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

3. Perform the fine weight balance check/adjustment using a spring balance:
a. Rotate the Gantry until the main weight reaches the 12 o’clock position.
b. Measure the force (F1 and F2) required to initiate Gantry rotation by pulling the Gantry with a spring
balance.
If the value ( F2-F1 ) is positive, decrease the weight in the Side Weight, until |F2-F1| is less than or equal
to 0.5kg. 
If the value is negative, increase the weight in the Side Weight. Note that when front adjustment
sheets reach the max number (13), start to add rear adjustment sheets (max mumber: 2) at the
back of the DAS mount plate, until |F2-F1| is less than or equal to 0.5kg. (Refer to Illustration 2-5)
c. Rotate the Gantry until the side weight reaches the 6 o’clock position.
d. Measure the force (F3 and F4) required to initiate Gantry rotation by pulling the Gantry with a spring
balance.
If the value ( F4-F3 ) is positive, decrease the weight in the Main Weight, until |F4-F3| is less than or
equal to 0.5kg. 
If the value is negative, increase the weight in the Main Weight. Note that when front adjustment
sheets reach the max number (11), start to add rear adjustment sheets (max number: 2) at the
back of the DAS mount plate, until |F4-F3| is less than or equal to 0.5kg. (Refer to Illustration 2-5)
Illustration 2-7 Gantry Static Balance Force Measurements
F2
F1
F3
F4
2-8 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Table 2-2 Unbalance Force Measure
Side Weight Main Weight

Unbalance (kg) Adjustment Sheet Unbalance (kg) Adjustment Sheet
|F2-F1| (5351914) (pcs) |F4-F3| (5352535) (pcs)
0~0.5 - 0~0.5 -
0.5~1.1 1 0.5~0.9 1
1.1~1.6 2 0.9~1.4 2
1.6~2.1 3 1.4~1.9 3
MECHANISM
2.1~2.7 4 1.9~2.3 4
2.7~3.2 5 2.3~2.8 5
3.2~3.7 6 2.8~3.3 6
3.7~4.3 7 3.3~3.8 7
4.3~4.8 8 3.8~4.2 8
4.8~5.3 9 4.2~4.7 9
GANTRY 2-9
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-3 G. PULSE POSITION

1. Preparation:
b. Switch OFF the ‘CB2’, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU
c. Remove the Gantry covers except the front cover.
2. Switch ON the ‘CB2’ and Service switches.
3. Rotate the Gantry in the CW direction by hand until LED of the G. Pulse 1 Sensor extinguishes. (See illustration
2-9)
4. Use the Digital Level Meter to measure the Collimator lower surface and verify that the angle is 0 0.5 deg.
Illustration 2-8 Digital Level Meter
Collimator
5. If angle is over the range, slightly loosen two adjusting bolts to adjust the sensor bracket.
6. Repeat the above steps until the angle meets the range.
2-10 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-3 G. PULSE POSITION (CONTINUED)
Illustration 2-9 G. Pulse Photo Sensor Location
GANTRY REAR VIEW
Photo Sensor
(G.Pluse 2)_Rotational Side
Adjuster Screw (x2)
Plate (x2)
MECHANISM
G.Pluse 1
LED
Photo Sensor
(G.Pulse 1)_Stationary Side
GANTRY REAR VIEW
LED Lights LED Extinguishes
Adjusting Screw (x2) LED
GANTRY 2-11
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-3 G. PULSE POSITION (CONTINUED)
Illustration 2-10 Photo Sensor & Plate Position

(SIDE VIEW)
Photo Sensor
Plate
6mm + 0.5mm
(TOP OR BOTTOM VIEW)

Photo Sensor
Plate (G. Pulse 1)
(Stationary) (Stationary)
-1 deg. Gantry Position Plate
Photo Sensor (Rotational)
H
(G. Pulse 2) A
(Rotational)
A = H/2 + 1.5mm
Plate Photo Sensor

Plate (G. Pulse 1)
(Stationary) (Rotational)
(Stationary)
0 deg. Gantry Position
A = H/2 + 1.5mm
H
A
Photo Sensor
(G. Pulse 2)
(Rotational)
2-12 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-4 AZIMUTH BELT TENSION

1. Preparation:
b. Switch OFF the ‘CB2’, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU
2. Remove the Axial Motor Pulley cover by unscrewing its 3 screws.
3. Adjust the adjusting bolt. (See Illustration 2-11)
a. Loosen the three mounting plate bolts.
b. Loosen the lock nut, and then turn the adjusting bolt in the CCW direction until the distance D (between part
A and part B) is approximately 2  3mm.
MECHANISM
NOTICE
Over tension. After part A and part B are just touching, do not rotate the adjusting bolt;
otherwise, this will cause over tension and will shorten the life of the axial drive belt.
c. Turn the adjusting bolt in the CW direction until part A and part B are just touching.
d. Tighten the lock nut.
e. Tighten the three mounting plate bolts.
4. Install the Axial Motor Pulley cover.
Illustration 2-11 Belt Tension Adjuster
Lock Nut
D
Spring
Adjusting Bolt
Axial Belt
Mounting Plate Bolt (x3)
GANTRY 2-13
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-5 HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY POSITION
Special Equipment
• Alignment Tool (Thickness Gauge)
NOTICE
HSDCD Receiver and Antenna are static sensitives. Before touching the components,
attach the wrist strap to your wrist and to the metal part of the chassis.
1. Preparation:
b. Switch OFF the ‘CB2‘, ‘CB4‘ and ‘XG Power‘ switches at the PDU.
c. Remove the rest covers from the Gantry.
2. Disconnect the fiber and power cables.
Illustration 2-12 HSDCD Receiver
GANTRY REAR VIEW
HSDCD Antenna
HSDCD Receiver Support
Fiber and Power Cables
2-14 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-5 HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY POSITION (CONTINUED)

3. Install the dial gauge onto the Slip Ring PCB surface, using the attachment tool (see illustration 2-17).
5. Rotate the Gantry by hand and find the average of radial eccentric position of the slip ring:
a. Find the Innermost and Outermost point;
b. Calculate the average between both;
c. Rotate the Gantry so that the obtained average value stay positioned underneath the HSDCD
Receiver Assy position.
6. Loose temporarily two screws of the HSDCD Support on the Gantry HLA, but don’t remove these two
screws. (Illustration 2-13)
7. Insert the thickness gauge provided in the Alignment Tool between the HSDCD Antenna and Slip Ring.
MECHANISM
8. Tighten two screws of the HSDCD Support on the Gantry HLA keeping the HSDCD Antenna in contact with
thickness gauge. (Illustration 2-13)
These two screws keep the HSDCD Antenna in parallel with Slip Ring’s PCB.
9. Remove the thickness gauge.
Illustration 2-13 Adjust HSDCD Receiver Assy in Parallel with Slip Ring
Thickness Gauge
Screw (x2)
GANTRY 2-15
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

10. Unscrew temporarily but not remove the three screws (with washers) of HSDCD Support that holds the HSDCD
Antenna. (Illustration 2-14).
Illustration 2-14 HSDCD Receiver Assy position adjustment
Screw and Washer (x3)
Support
PCB
Slip Ring HSDCD Antenna
11. Adjust the HSDCD Antenna position along the antenna of Slip Ring so that the tolerance between the center
lines does not exceed 0.4 mm. (Illustration 2-15).
Illustration 2-15 HSDCD Receiver Assy Position Adjustment
Center Line of
the Antenna of PCB
(Approx: 0.4 mm) (Approx: 0.4 mm)
Center Line of the Antenna

of HSDCD Receiver Assy
Slip Ring
HSDCD HSDCD
PCB Antenna PCB Antenna HSDCD PCB Antenna Antenna
Antenna Antenna
OK Not allowed
OK
Readjustment
Required
2-16 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

12. Adjust the three screws (with washers) of HSDCD Antenna that holds the HSDCD Support (Illustration 2-14)
to allow fine horizontal adjustment.
13. Tighten these three screws .
MEASUREMENT CHECK
Special Equipment
Prepare the following measurement tool:
• Shim (Alignment Tool)
• Magnifying Class
MECHANISM
a. Prepare a 1.0mm shim and certify that might be inserted between the HSDCD Antenna and Slip Ring in four
places indicated in the Illustration 2-16.
b. Prepare a 1.8mm shim and certify that might not be inserted between the HSDCD Antenna and Slip Ring
in four places.
c. If at least one of condition b. and c. does not agree, proceed againg the HSDCD Receiver Assy Position
from the step 8. Otherwise proceed the next step.
Illustration 2-16 Clearance Inspection
PCB HSDCD Antenna
Clearance Inspection
GANTRY 2-17
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

14. Switch OFF the ‘CB2’ switch.
15. Reconnect the optical fiber and power cables to the receiver.
17. Rotate the Gantry manually to perform the following checks:
Check to make sure that the HSDCD Antenna does not touch the Slip Ring during its revolution.
Check to make sure that the cables does not catch on any stationary components during each revolution.
Check if the movement is smooth and there is no abnormal noise. Make more than one complete rotation.
18. Switch ON the ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
19. Switch ON the service switch at the TGP board.
20. Perform the Gantry rotation using TGP service switches and verify if the movement is smooth.
21. Perform following adjustment and check according to the Functional Check & Adjustment manual, DAS/DE-
TECTOR.
DATA TRANSFER CHECK
23. END
2-18 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-6 SLIP RING RADIAL POSITION
Special Equipment
• Gloves
• Vacuum Cleaner
• Attachment Tool
• Plastic Hammer
CAUTION
When servicing the Slip Rings and Brushes, wait approximately five minutes after switching
OFF the ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ at the PDU for all capacitors in the XG Unit to discharge.
MECHANISM
CAUTION
Exercise caution when working with slip ring components to avoid contact, inhalation, and
ingestion of slip ring brush powder.

Gloves : Large size : 46-194427P400, X-Large size : 46-194427P401
HEPA Vacuum Cleaner : 46-297933P1 to remove brush block powder (dust).

Do not remove gloves near an exposed slip ring. The powder inside the glove can
contaminate the ring.
NOTICE
Do not touch the slip ring surfaces. Do not touch the brush surfaces either.

Do not handle the slip ring surfaces and brushes without GLOVES.
GANTRY 2-19
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-6 SLIP RING RADIAL POSITION (CONTINUED)

1. Preparation:
c. Remove the Gantry right side, top and rear covers.
d. Remove the following components from the Gantry: (Refer to Component Replacement Manual, Gantry,
Gantry Rotational, Slip Ring Assy)
• All Slip Ring covers and supports 16 Screws

• Brush Block Assy 4 Screws
• HSDCD Receiver Assy 2 Screws
• two Cable Protect Covers 2 x 2 Screws
2. Install the dial gauge onto Slip Ring groove or PCB surface, using the attachment tool (see illustration 2-17).
4. Check the radial position of the slip ring:
a. Check that the rotation center of the slip ring is not out of the Gantry rotation center, while rotating the Gantry
in the CCW direction by hand 
for HSDCD Slip Ring: less than 0.7mm, ignore the PCB TERMINATION GAP on the PCB surface.
If the radial position of slip ring is out of specification, perform step 5.
If the position is within the specification, go to step 8.
Illustration 2-17 Dial Gauge
PCB Surface Rod of the Dial Gauge
2-20 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

5. Adjust the radial position of the Slip Ring:
a. Rotate the Gantry by hand until a slip ring support frame is accessible.
b. Loosen the 4 mounting bolts that fasten the Slip Ring assy to the support frame.
c. Rotate the Gantry by hand until another support frame is accessible.
d. Loosen the mounting blots, and repeat the procedure to loosen a total of 24 mounting bolts.
e. Tighten the 6 mounting bolts (Torque: 0.98Nm/10kg.cm) shown in illustration 2-18.
Illustration 2-18 Slip Ring Support Frame and Mounting Bolts
Alignment Groove Pin(*1)
MECHANISM
(*2)
Slip Ring (*2)
Support Frame
Tighten 6 Mounting
Pin (*1) Bolts (Torque:
0.98Nm/10kg.cm)
Mounting Bolts
Slip Ring Assy Pin (*1)

(*2)
Slip Ring Assy
Bolts
(*1): Pin behind Support Frame

(*2): Support Frame without Pin
GANTRY 2-21
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

f. Rotate the Gantry by hand and stop when the rod of the dial gauge retracts most (see illustration 2-19).
g. Shift the Slip Ring assy in the a-a’ direction using the plastic hammer while checking the Slip Ring
movement with the dial gauge.
NOTICE
Hammer the inner circumference part of the Slip Ring assy only. Do not hit other parts.
If the Slip Ring assy does not move, perform the following until the Slip Ring can be moved by hammering:
i. Loosen the 6 mounting bolts tightened in step e, and tighten them again. (Torque: decrease by
1kg.cm).
h. Repeat steps f and g, until the Slip Ring assy is positioned at the Gantry rotation center.
for HSDCD Slip Ring: less than 0.7mm, ignore the PCB TERMINATION GAP.
Note
If the position of the Slip Ring assy does not meet the specification, loosen the 2 (x3) bolts fastening
support frame (without Pin) to Gantry rotational frame, and perform step h, then tighten the 6 (2x3)
bolts (Torque: 6N.m) (see illustration 2-18).
Illustration 2-19 Slip Ring Positioning
Dial Gauge Outer

Circumference
Rod
a
a’
Correct Radial Position

of the Slip Ring Slip Ring Assy
Inner Circumference
2-22 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

6. Tighten the 6 mounting bolts (Torque: 6N.m) in the order shown in illustration 2-20 ( 1  6 ).
7. Tighten the rest mounting bolts (Torque: 6N.m) in the cross order shown in illustration 2-20 ( 1  6 ).
Illustration 2-20 Mounting Bolts Tightening

Pin
1 (behind Support Frame)
Pin
(behind Support Frame)
1 4
6 3
MECHANISM
6 2
4 5
3 5
2 Pin
(behind Support Frame)
8. Install the following components:
• two Cable Protect Covers

• HSDCD Receiver Assy
• Brush Block Assy
• All Slip Ring covers and supports
10. END
GANTRY 2-23
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
2-24 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 3 - ROTATIONAL OPERATION
WARNING
3-1 GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT

1. Preparation:
a. Remove the gantry left side cover.
OPERATION
b. Switch OFF the ‘CB2, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
c. Remove the right side, top and front covers from the Gantry.
2. Set the service switches of TGP board as follows:
• SVON/SVOFF (SW1): SVON
• SYS/MNL (SW2): SYS
• JOG/OFF/CNT (SW3): OFF
• FAST/SLOW (SW4): SLOW
CAUTION
Gantry may experience sudden high speed rotation due to order from the OC. Be very care-
ful; stand clear of the rotating Gantry.
3. Check that the Gantry Initialize Sequence is normally performed.

a. Be ready to hit the Emergency OFF switch in case of any rotational problems, and then, switch ON the
‘CB2’‘CB4’‘XG Power’ switches.
b. Make sure Axial Drive display is ‘d’.
c. Set the TGP service switch SVON/SVOFF to SVOFF.
The Gantry starts rotating at 15 sec/Rot and stops after pass home position (during which Gantry Initialize
Sequence is performed). The Axial Drive display is ‘E’.
Note
For one new axial drive, TGP need configure parameters for it. During configuration, LED ‘MNLT’
is lit on TGP board until TGP finishes the operation. This procedure takes about 3 minutes. After
the configuration, the Gantry can start rotation.
During the Gantry Initialize Sequence, if the Gantry can not rotate (ex. TGP service switch (SVON)
is set to ON), LED ‘ERRG’ is lit on the TGP board. (Waiting for Gantry rotation) To release this sta-
tus, set the service switches properly.
Note
Before LED ‘MNLT’ is off, make sure not to switch off the power of TGP or the Axial Drive, otherwise
it will probably cause the Axial Driver in fault.
GANTRY 3-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-2 MOVEMENT CHECK

1. Preparation:
Gantry initialize movement should be finished.
• SVON/SVOFF (SW1): SVOFF
• SYS/MNL (SW2): MNL
3. Check the Gantry rotation movement by setting all the possible speeds:
a. Set the JOG/OFF/CNT switch to JOG from OFF. Gantry will start rotation.
Verify that the Gantry rotates smoothly, and that there is no abnormal noise.
b. Set the JOG/OFF/CNT switch to OFF from JOG. Gantry will stop.
c. Set the JOG/OFF/CNT switch to CNT from OFF. Gantry will start rotation.
Verify that the Gantry rotates smoothly, and that there is no abnormal noise, while the Gantry rotates for
more than one rotation.
d. Set the JOG/OFF/CNT switch to OFF from CNT. Gantry will stop at the home position.
e. Do the same check above for each of the following settings.
TGP SERVICE SWITCH

SVON/SVOFF SYS/MNL JOG/OFF/CNT FAST/SLOW
SVOFF MNL CNT/OFF SLOW
SVOFF MNL CNT/OFF FAST
4. Set the TGP service switch SYS/MNL to SYS.
3-2 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-3 ROTATION POSITION DISPLAY

1. Preparation:
3. Set the T6 Gantry dip switch (switch S1) to ON on the TGP board.
4. Push the TEST1 switch to enter TGP off-line function #400 (Gantry position display mode).
OPERATION
Verify that the seven segment display is the current Gantry position (unit: 0.1 degree).
5. Rotate the Gantry and check/adjust the Gantry rotation postion displayed on the Gantry Display:
Set JOG/OFF/CNT switch to CNT from OFF. Gantry will start rotation.
Verify that the seven segment display is updated during the rotation to show Gantry position.
6. Set JOG/OFF/CNT switch to OFF from CNT. Gantry will stop at the home position.
Verify that the seven segment display shows ‘0.0’.
3-4 ROTATION SPEED DISPLAY

1. Preparation:
3. Set the T6 Gantry dip switch (switch S1) to ON on the TGP board.
4. Push the TEST1 switch to enter TGP off-line function #401 (Gantry speed display mode).
5. Rotate the Gantry at a specified speed and check/adjust the Gantry rotation speed displayed on the Gantry
Display:
a. Set the TGP service switches as follows to rotate the Gantry (5.0 sec/Rot).
• JOG/OFF/CNT (SW3): CNT
GANTRY 3-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-4 ROTATION SPEED DISPLAY (CONTINUED)

b. After Gantry rotation is stabilized (a few rotations are required), check if the rotation time shown in the Dis-
play shows a value 5000100 (unit: ms).
c. Set FAST/SLOW switch on TGP board to FAST from SLOW. Perform the same check for the Gantry rota-
tion speed 1.0 sec/Rot:
The display will show a value 100020.
6. Set the TGP service switches as follows, when completed all of above check/adjustment procedure.
• SYS/MNL (SW2): SYS
7. Set the T6 Gantry dip switch (switch S1) to OFF on the TGP board.
8. Press the RESET switch on the TGP board. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.
3-4 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 4 - SLIP RINGS AND BRUSHES
4-1 CAUTION AND NOTICE
CAUTION
When servicing the Slip Rings and Brushes, wait approximately five minutes after switching
OFF the ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU for all capacitors in the XG Unit to
SECTION 4 - SLIP RINGS AND

discharge.
BRUSHES
CAUTION
Exercise caution when working with slip ring components to avoid contact, inhalation, and
ingestion of slip ring brush powder.
Gloves : Large size : 46-194427P400, X-Large size : 46-194427P401
HEPA Vacuum Cleaner : 46-297933P1 to remove brush block powder (dust).
Do not remove gloves near an exposed slip ring. The powder inside the glove can
contaminate the ring.
NOTICE
Do not touch the slip ring surfaces. Do not touch the brush surfaces either.
Do not handle the slip ring surfaces and brushes without GLOVES.
GANTRY REAR VIEW
Signal Brushes
Power Brushes
Power Cables
GANTRY 4-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-2 SIGNAL BRUSH CONTACT
Special Equipment
• Ring Service Tool (2206131)
This includes a test battery source. The output voltage should be 6 V or more; otherwise replace the dry
batteries with new ones.
• Oscilloscope
Overview
The following procedure checks if the contact (conductivity) between signal brushes and slip rings is proper. The
conductivity is examined by injecting a DC current and observing the current flow in the circuit by the oscilloscope
while rotating the slip ring, as outlined in Illustration 4-1.
Two signal slip rings are equipped on the slip ring frame: 
7&8 Control Signal
The contact check will be performed for each of these two sets of rings.
Illustration 4-1 Connection Diagram

Signal Brushes
Signal Board
7&8
7 & 8, or
9 & 10, or
11 & 12
6 VDC 120 W
120ohm
Oscilloscope
Short Circuit in
Slip Ring Frame
4-2 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-2 SIGNAL BRUSH CONTACT (CONTINUED)

1. Preparation:
a. Remove the Gantry left side cover.
b. Switch OFF the ‘CB2’, ‘CB4‘ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
2. Remove the Brush Block Cover by unscrewing its 4 Allen screws.
3. Disconnect the signal cable connector J7 and power cable connector from the MUX board. (Illustration 4-3)

4. Disconnect the cable connector from the Brush Block. (See Illustration 4-3)
5. Short-circuit the slip rings:
Illustration 4-2 Short the Signal Rings
BRUSHES
Brass wire for shorting
two signal rings
Two Terminals for Signal Ring
a. Unscrew two screws shown as the above figure.

b. Short them with a brass wires.
Note
Rotate the Gantry manually to check that nothing interferes the Gantry during rotation.
GANTRY 4-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

6. Set the Signal Brush Board for current flow check:
Connect the oscilloscope probes and 6 VDC power wires to the Signal Brush as shown below illustration (for
Rings 7 & 8). (Use a digital storage type oscilloscope; envelope mode)
Illustration 4-3 Signal Brush Board Wire Connection - HSDCD Brush Block
Power Cable Connector
J7 Oscilloscope
8
7 Test Buttery Source
6 VDC
Disconnect this
Cable Connector
Resistor
120Ω
4-4 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
NOTICE
Check to make sure the removed cables does not catch on the any stationary components
during each revolution.
7. Switch ON the ‘CB2’, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
8. Rotate the Gantry and observe the current flow (voltage across a register) on oscilloscope:
a. Set the TGP Service Switches as follows to rotate the Gantry (1 sec/Rot).

SVON

SVON/SVOFF
SYS/MNL MNL
JOG/OFF/CNT CNT
FAST/SLOW FAST
BRUSHES
b. Verify that there are no voltage drops grater than 0.5 V or voltage fluctuations.
9. Switch OFF the ‘CB2’, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.
10. Restore the Signal Brush Board and Slip Ring to original configuration.
a. Remove the oscilloscope probes and power supply wires.
b. Reconnect the signal cable connector J7 and power cable connector to the Brush Board.
c. Restore the Multiplexer to original configuration.
11. Set the TGP Service Switches to original configuration.
GANTRY 4-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-3 SIGNAL AND POWER BRUSHES
NOTICE
Do not touch the slip ring surfaces. Do not touch the brush surfaces either.
4-3-1 Signal and Power Brush Wear (Erosion)

Perform the following check periodically (once every three months).
1. Preparation:
2. Remove the Brush Block Protect Cover by unscrewing its 4 screws from the HSDCD Brush Block Assy.
3. Remove the Brush Block Assy following the COMPONENT REPLACEMENT - GANTRY - HSDCD BRUSH
Assy, Removal.
4-6 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-3-1 Signal and Power Brush Wear (Erosion) (continued)
HSDCD Brush Block

4. Visually inspect all brushes (Signal Brushes and Power Brushes) for wear.
There is a check mark on each brush; if any brush is worn the check mark then the brush assembly must be
replaced. 
Refer to Component Replacement Manual - Gantry - Gantry Stationary - Brush Assy.
Illustration 4-4 Checking the Worn-Out Brushes

BRUSHES
Signal Brushes
High-Power Brushes (380V)
GND
Low-Power Brushes (115V)
Check Mark
New Brush Check during Replace at the

next Periodic next Periodic
Maintenance Maintenance
or within 300k
rotations
5. Restore the Brush Block Assy to its original configuration.
Refer to COMPONENT REPLACEMENT manual - GANTRY - HSDCD BRUSH Assy, Installation.
GANTRY 4-7
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-3-2 Cleaning of Brush Block Assy
HSDCD Brush Block Assy
Special Equipment
• HEPA Vacuum Cleaner
• Kim Wipe (2254011)
1. Preparation:
2. Disconnect the signal cable connector J7 and the power cable connector connected to the signal brush board.
3. Remove the Brush Block Protect Cover by unscrewing its 4 screws from the HSDCD brush block assy.
4. Remove the Brush Block Assy following the COMPONENT REPLACEMENT - GANTRY - HSDCD BRUSH
Assy, Removal.
Illustration 4-5 Brush Block Assy
GANTRY REAR VIEW
Power Cable Connector
Signal Cable Connector
Signal Brushes
Power Brushes
Power Cables
4-8 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-3-2 Cleaning of Brush Block Assy (continued)

5. Clean all the HSDCD Brush Block Assy using dry Kim Wipe.
NOTICE
Handle the Brushes with care to avoid breakages or deep scratches.
Illustration 4-6 Brushes

BRUSHES
Signal Brushes
High-Power Brushes (380V)
GND
Low-Power Brushes (115V)
6. Wipe the scrapings from the brush surface with the dry Kim Wipe.
7. Restore the Brush Block Assy to its original configuration. 
Refer to COMPONENT REPLACEMENT manual - GANTRY - HSDCD BRUSH Assy, Installation.
GANTRY 4-9
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-4 HSDCD SLIP RING CLEANING
Special Equipment
• SlipRing Eraser (5169251)
1. Preparation:
a. From the service desktop, shut down the system.
b. Power OFF the PC and LCD power.
Illustration 4-7 Power OFF PC and LCD Power
PC LCD
Power Switch
Exit
Power Switch
c. Remove the Gantry left side cover.

d. Switch OFF all switches (CB1~CB7, XG Power) at the PDU.
e. Remove the Gantry covers except the front cover.
f. Remove the PDU Cover by unscrewing its screws.
2. Remove the Brush Block Cover by unscrewing its four screws.
4-10 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-4 HSDCD SLIP RING CLEANING (CONTINUED)

3. Use the multimeter to measure and verify output voltage of the PDU (380V) and input voltage (both 380V
and 115V) of the Brush Block Assy is power off.
Illustration 4-8 Measure PDU Output Voltage

BRUSHES
Illustration 4-9 Measure Brush Block Assy Input Voltage
115V Test Terminal (x2) 380V Test Terminal (X3)
GANTRY 4-11
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

4. Remove the Brush Block Assy following the COMPONENT REPLACEMENT manual - GANTRY - HSDCD
BRUSH Assy, Removal.
NOTICE
The brushes are very fragile. Handle the Brush Block with care and put it on the cushion
shown as below illustration.
Note
Use of Neoprene or nitrile gloves to limit irritation and ingestion of metallic dusts is recommended.
Do not remove gloves near an exposed slip ring. The powder inside the glove can contaminate the
ring.
5. Remove a part of the slipring covers by unscrewing its eight screws shown as below illustration.
Take off this portion as a whole, it is not necessary to remove them piece by piece.
Illustration 4-10 SlipRing Cover Removal
4-12 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

6. Clean the slip rings and the surrounding area:
a. Clean off the dust from the slip ring tracks and carefully around the block with a HEPA vacuum cleaner and
the soft brush attachment.
Note
The soft brush attachment that comes with the HEPA vacuum cleaner should NOT be used for any-
thing other than slip ring brush debris cleaning. The brush must be kept clean to avoid aontamina-
tion of the slip ring and brush tips.
b. Use the slip ring eraser (Illustration 4-11) to carefully rub the tracks using a large, sweeping motion.

NOTICE
Do not polish the Slip Ring surfaces and the brush surfaces using an abrasive (or equiva-
BRUSHES
lent).
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
Do not rub intensely in one spot for a long period of time. The ring color should return to a
shiny new brass color. (Illustration 4-11)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Illustration 4-11 Cleaning with the Eraser
GANTRY 4-13
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

c. Switch ON the ‘CB1’, ‘CB2’, ‘CB5’ and ‘CB6’ switches.
d. Wait TGP board initializtion completion, then rotate the Gantry manually to show up the next segment of
slipring.
e. Switch OFF the ‘CB1’, ‘CB2’, ‘CB5’ and ‘CB6’ switches.
f. Repeat steps from b to e till the whole slipring is cleaning.
7. Clean the tracks and surrounding area again with the HEPA vacuum cleaner.
8. Wipe the track with a soft white linen cloth while using the vacuum cleaner to remove any other debris.
9. Remove gloves and wash hands thoroughly after cleaning.
10. Make sure ‘CB1’, ‘CB2’, ‘CB5’ and ‘CB6’ switches are off positions.
11. Install the Brush Block following the COMPONENT REPLACEMENT manual - GANTRY - HSDCD BRUSH
Assy, Installation.
12. Switch ON the ‘CB1’, ‘CB2’, ‘CB5’ and ‘CB6’ switches at the PDU.
13. Rotate the Gantry manually to check if the movement is smooth and there is no abnormal noise. Make more
than one complete rotation.
14. Switch ON the ‘CB3’, ‘CB7’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
15. Wait the Axial Driver initialization to ‘E’ status.
16. Rotate the Gantry (1 sec/Rot) about several minutes to let the Brush Block Assy match the Slip Ring completely
by setting the TGP service switches as follows:
SVON/SVOFF SVOFF
SYS/MNL MNL
JOG/OFF/CNT CNT
FAST/SLOW FAST
17. Set the TGP Service Switches to original configuration.
18. Switch OFF the ‘CB2’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
19. Restore the Gantry and OC to the original configuration.
4-14 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-5 BRUSH DEBRIS CLEANING

1. Preparation:
2. Remove the slip ring covers.
3. Clean the following portion using the HEPA Vacuum Cleaner.

• Inside of the Gantry Front Cover
• Inside of the Gantry Rear Cover
• Inside of the Slip Ring Cover
BRUSHES
• Slip Ring Tracks
• Slip Ring Wear Cover
4. Clean the following portion using the dry Kim Wipe.
• Detector Surface
• Inside of the Myler Ring
5. Restore the Gantry to the original configuration.
GANTRY 4-15
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-5 BRUSH DEBRIS CLEANING (CONTINUED)
Illustration 4-12 Cleaning Portion
Inside of the Gantry F/R Covers Gantry Slip Ring Inside of the Slip Ring Covers
Detector Surface Inside of the Myler Ring
4-16 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 5 - COLLIMATOR FOR BRIVO CT315
5-1 APERTURE RATIO

1. Perform the following six offline scans, following the steps below.
Scan Parameter/Condition
Exam No.
Thickness Scan Parameter/Condition
1 10 mm Other Scan Parameters (common to all the scans):
SECTION 5 - COLLIMATOR FOR

Air, Stationary, 1.5 sec, 120 kV, 60 mA
Bow-tie Filter: Installed
BRIVO CT315
2 1 mm
3 2 mm
4 3 mm
5 5 mm
6 7 mm
a. Select Offline Scan; refer to below:
Service  Diagnostics  Offline Scan

b. Select Stationary from ‘Technic - [Scan Type]’.
c. Perform the scans listed above.
GANTRY 5-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
5-1 APERTURE RATIO (CONTINUED)

2. Obtain the following mean files 1  6 (vectors) from the acquired raw data, by repeating the steps below.
Raw Data File Series No. Mean File (Vector) No.

10 mm Thickness Scan 1 1
a. Select Format Raw Data; refer to below:
Service  Diagnostics  Generic System Analyzer (GSA)  Format Raw Data

b. Select 1 (2, 3, ...) for the raw data file ID No. from the lists.
c. Perform Fan Data with the following settings:
Offset File Correction Yes

Reference Correction No
Natural Log Conversion No
d. Select Active Mean from File Data Type.

e. Store mean files (vectors) to Vector No.1 (2, 3, ...).
5-2 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

3. Perform division operations to obtain the following mean files (vectors) 7  11, by repeating the steps below.
Vector Division Vector No. for

Division
File A File B
No. 2 (1 mm) / No. 1 (10 mm) 2 1 7
No. 3 (2 mm) / No. 1 (10 mm) 3 1 8
No. 4 (3 mm) / No. 1 (10 mm) 4 1 9
No. 5 (5 mm) / No. 1 (10 mm) 5 1 10

No. 6 (7 mm) / No. 1 (10 mm) 6 1 11
BRIVO CT315
a. Select Vect/Vect. Op; refer to below:
Service  Diagnostics  Generic System Analyzer (GSA)  Analysis  

Calculations  Vect/Vect. Op
b. Select A/B from ‘Select Operation’.
c. Select 2 (3, ...) for FILE A.

Select 1 for FILE B.
d. Store mean files (vectors) to Vector No.7 (8, ...).
4. Check the aperture ratio using View Vector:
a. Select View Vector; refer to below:
Service  Diagnostics  Generic System Analyzer (GSA)  Analysis  View Vector

b. Select the vector file No. 7.
GANTRY 5-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Check for ‘(1 mm) / (10 mm)’

c. Click on [Plot].
d. Select ‘Manual Scale.’

Enter 0.10 for DATA MIN.

Enter 0.16 for DATA MAX. (The specification for the vector file No. 7 is 0.10  0.16)

A graph like in Illustration 5-1 is drawn.
Check that the graph (aperture ratio) falls within the specification, 0.10  0.16.
Illustration 5-1 Aperture Ratio
0.16
0.15
0.14
0.13
0.12
0.11
Check for Other Aperture Ratios

e. Check the other aperture ratios (vector files No. 8, 9, 10, and 11) as described in Table below, by similarly
repeating steps b through d. (at step b, select 8, 9, 10, or 11, for a vector No., respectively)
Table 5-1 Aperture Ratio Specification
Vector File No. Aperture Ratio Specification

7 (1 mm) / (10 mm) 0.13 0.03 (0.10  0.16)
8 (2 mm) / (10 mm) 0.2 0.0 3 (0.17  0.23)
9 (3 mm) / (10 mm) 0.3 0.03 (0.27  0.33)
10 (5 mm) / (10 mm) 0.5 0.05 (0.45  0.55)
11 (7 mm) / (10 mm) 0.7 0.07 (0.63  0.77)
5-4 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
5-2 BOW-TIE FILTER CURVE TEST
General Information
Prerequisites for this test are as follows:
• The DAS/Detector has been powered ON for more than two hours.
• The x-ray alignment (‘Plane of Rotation’, ‘Detector Bean-on-Window’, ‘ISO Center Alignment’ and ‘Filter
Center Alignment’) is proper.
After ending this test, the ‘Filter Center Alignment’ check/adjustment is required.
Replace the filter if the test below fails; or, replace the filter approximately every 100,000 scans, since the filter

material will be gradually deteriorated by x-ray radiation, which may cause crack or break in the filter.
1. Preparation:
BRIVO CT315
c. Remove the gantry right side, top and front covers.
2. Perform two air stationary scans with the filter installed and removed:

b. Select Stationary from ‘Technic - [Scan Type]‘.
GANTRY 5-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
5-2 BOW-TIE FILTER CURVE TEST (CONTINUED)

c. Perform the following scans:
Scan 1 Scan 2
Scan Time : 3.0 sec Scan Time : 3.0 sec
Thickness : 10 mm Thickness : 10 mm
Focus : Large Focus : Large
KV : 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA MA : 60 mA
20 mA 20mA
Series No. : 1 Series No. : 2
(Others) : (defaults) (Others) : (defaults)

Filter : Installed Filter : Removed
For filter removal, refer to the Component Replacement manual.
(Switch OFF the ‘CB3’ switch prior to removing the filter!)
3. Store the following vector files (mean files) 1 and 2 out of the acquired raw data, by repeating the steps below.
Raw Data File Series No. Vector File No.

(Filter Scan) 1 1
(No Filter Scan) 2 2

b. Select the raw data file with ID No. 1 (2) from the lists.
c. Perform Fan Data with the following settings:

Reference Correction Yes
d. Select Active Mean as a Data Type.

e. Select Store to File.
f. Enter 1 (2) as the Vector File No.
5-6 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

4. Apply a division to the vector files No.1 and No.2:

b. Select A/B from ‘Select Operation.’
c. Select 1 as FILE A.

Select 2 as FILE B.

d. Store the result to Vector No. 3.
5. Check the calculated vector file No.3 using View Vector:
BRIVO CT315

View Vector
b. Select the vector file No. 3.
c. Click on [Plot].

Enter 0 for Data Min.

Enter 50 for Data Max. (Change this, if necessary)

A filter curve is drawn, as is shown in Illustration 5-2.
Check that the curve is smooth.
Illustration 5-2 Filter Curve
40.000
10.000
6. Perform ‘Filter Center Alignment‘ of ‘System‘ Functional Check/Adjustment - ‘X-ray Alignment’.
GANTRY 5-7
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
5-8 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 6 - COLLIMATOR FOR BRIVO CT325
6-1 APERTURE RATIO

1. Perform the following six offline scans, following the steps below.
Scan Parameter/Condition
Exam No.
Thickness Scan Parameter/Condition
1 7 mm Other Scan Parameters (common to all the scans):

Air, Stationary, 1 sec, 120 kV, 60 mA
Auto Collimator on
Bow-tie Filter: Installed
BRIVO CT325
2 1 mm
3 2 mm
4 3 mm
5 5 mm
6 10 mm

c. Perform the scans listed above.
GANTRY 6-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

2. Obtain the following mean files 1  6 (vectors) from the acquired raw data, by repeating the steps below.
Raw Data File Raw Data File No. to be Mean File (Vector) No. File Comment
Selected
7 mm Thickness Scan Exam#1, Series#1, 1 7mm Ach
Acq No: 1
Acq No: 1
Acq No: 1
Acq No: 1
Acq No: 1
Acq No: 1
Note: “Ach“ described in File Comment means A channel. “Bch“ should be commented when testing B chan-
nel

b. Select A Side. ( A channel )
c. Select the raw data file ( Exam#1, Series#1, Acq No: 1 ) from the Raw data browser lists.
d. Perform Fan Data with the following settings, then click on OK:

e. Select Active Mean as “Select Type of Data:“.

f. Click on Store to File.
g. Enter 1 as “Mean Vector Number“ and 7mm Ach as “File Comment“, then click on OK.
h. Click on Select RawID... to return to the Fan Data Format screen, and repeat steps c to g to make Vector
files 2 to 6.
6-2 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

3. Perform division operations to obtain the following mean files (vectors) 7  11, by repeating the steps below.
Vector Data Files

Vector Division Output Vector Number Comment
File A File B
No. 2 (1 mm) / No. 1 (7 mm) 2 1 7 1/7 Ach
No. 3 (2 mm) / No. 1 (7 mm) 3 1 8 2/7 Ach
No. 4 (3 mm) / No. 1 (7 mm) 4 1 9 3/7 Ach
No. 5 (5 mm) / No. 1 (7 mm) 5 1 10 5/7 Ach

No. 6 (10 mm) / No. 1 (7 mm) 6 1 11 10/7 Ach
Note: "Ach" described in File Comment means A channel. "Bch" should be commented when testing B
channel
BRIVO CT325
Service  Diagnostics  Generic System Analyzer (GSA)  Analysis  Calculations

 Vect/Vect. Op
c. Select MeanFile 2 as Vect Data File A.

Select MeanFile 1 as Vect Data File B.
d. Enter 7 as “Output Vector Number“ and 1/10 ( or 1/7 Ach) as “Comment“, then click on OK.
e. Repeat steps c to d to make Vector files 8 to 11.
4. Check the aperture ratio using View Vector:


View Vector
b. Select MeanFile 7-1/7 Ach as “Select SupMean File:“.
GANTRY 6-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Check for ‘(1 mm) / (7 mm) Ach’

c. Click on [Plot].

Enter 0.11 for DATA MIN.
Enter 0.18 for DATA MAX. (The specification for the vector file No. 7 is 0.12  0.18)

A graph like in Illustration 6-1 is drawn.
Check that the graph (aperture ratio) falls within the specification, 0.117  0.174.
Illustration 6-1 Aperture Ratio
0.16
0.15
0.14
0.13
0.12
0.11
Check for Other Aperture Ratios

e. Check the other aperture ratios (vector files No. 8, 9, 10, and 11) as described in Table below, by similarly
repeating steps b through d. (at step b, select 8, 9, 10, or 11, for a vector No., respectively)
Table 6-1 Aperture Ratio Specification
Vector File No. Aperture Ratio Specification

7 (1 mm) / (7 mm) (0.117  0.174)
8 (2 mm) / (7 mm) (0.234  0.349)
9 (3 mm) / (7 mm) (0.325  0.523)
10 (5 mm) / (7 mm) (0.584  0.873)
11 (10 mm) / (7 mm) (1.169  1.746)
5. Repeat Steps 2 to 4 for B Side (B channel).
6-4 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
6-2 BOW-TIE FILTER CURVE TEST
General Information
Prerequisites for this test are as follows:
• The DAS/Detector has been powered ON for more than two hours.
• The x-ray alignment (‘Plane of Rotation’, ‘Detector Bean-on-Window’, ‘Q-cal Channel Ratio’, ‘Iso Center
Alignment’, and ‘Filter Center Alignment’) is proper.
After ending this test, the ‘Filter Center Alignment’ check/adjustment is required.
Replace the filter if the test below fails; or, replace the filter approximately every 100,000 scans, since the filter

material will be gradually deteriorated by x-ray radiation, which may cause crack or break in the filter.
1. Preparation:
BRIVO CT325
2. Perform two air stationary scans with the filter installed and removed:

b. Select Stationary from ‘Technic - [Scan Type]‘.
GANTRY 6-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

c. Perform the following scans:
Scan 1 Scan 2
Scan Time : 3.0 sec Scan Time : 3.0 sec
Thickness : 10 mm Thickness : 10 mm
Focus : Large Focus : Large
KV: 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA MA : 60 mA
(Others) : (defaults) (Others) : (defaults)

Filter : Installed Filter : Removed
For filter removal, refer to the Component Replacement manual.
(Switch OFF the ‘CB3’ switch prior to removing the filter!)
3. Store the following vector files (mean files) 1 and 2 out of the acquired raw data, by repeating the steps below.
Raw Data File Raw Data File No. to be Mean Vector File Comment
Selected No.
(Filter Scan) Exam#1, Series#1, 1 Filter Ach
Acq No: 1
(No Filter Scan) Exam#2, Series#1, 2 No Filter Ach
Acq No: 1
Note: “Ach“ described in File Comment means A channel. “Bch“ should be commented when
testing B channel

b. Select A side. (A channel)
c. Select the raw data file (Exam#1, Series#1, Acq No: 1) from the Raw data browser lists.

Reference Correction Yes
e. Select Active Mean as “Select Type of Data:“.

f. Click on Store to File.
g. Enter 1 as “Mean Vector Number“ and Filter Ach as “File Comment“, then click on OK.
h. Click on Select RawID... to return to the Fan Data Format screen, and repeat steps c to g to make Vector
files 2 .
6-6 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

4. Apply a division to the vector files No.1 and No.2:

c. Select MeanFile 1 as Vect Data File A.

Select MeanFile 2 as Vect Data File B.

d. Enter 3 as “Output Vector Number“ and Filter/NoFilter Ach as “Comment“, then click on OK
5. Check the calculated vector file No.3 using View Vector:
BRIVO CT325
Service  Diagnostics  Generic System Analyzer (GSA)  Analysis  View Vector

b. Select MeanFile 3 -- Filter/NoFilter Ach as “Select SupMean File:“.
c. Select the vector file No. 3.
d. Click on [Plot].
e. Select ‘Manual Scale.’

Enter 0 for Data Min.

Enter 50 for Data Max. (Change this, if necessary)

A filter curve is drawn, as is shown in Illustration 6-2.
Check that the curve is smooth.
GANTRY 6-7
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Illustration 6-2 Filter Curve
40.000
10.000
6. Repeat Steps 3 to 5 for B Side (B channel).

7. Perform ‘Filter Center Alignment’ of ‘System’ Functional Check/Adjustment -- “X-ray Alignment”.
6-8 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
6-3 APERTURE Z-AXIS BELT TENSION

1. Preparation:
e. Rotate the Gantry until the x-ray tube reaches the 12 o’clock position by hand.

2. On service desktop menu, select Service  Diagnostics  Offline Scan  T/G Control  Col. Mode 
VIBRATION.
If the belt tension is correct, both sides of the belt (upper and lower) are vibrating.
BRIVO CT325
if not, adjust the belt tension as follows:
a. Loosen the four Allen screws that fasten the Motor to the motor bracket.
b. Rotate the pulley of the screw assy in the CW direction by hand, until the upper or lower belt vibrates.
i. If the upper belt is vibrating, increase the belt tension by rotating the adjustment bolt in the CCW direc-
tion, until both sides of the belt vibrates.
ii. If the lower belt is vibrating, decrease the belt tension by rotating the adjustment bolt in the CW direc-
tion, until both sides of the belt vibrates.
c. Unscrew one of the four Allen screws, and apply loctite 242 to the screw, then tighten it again with 30kgf.cm.
d. Repeat the above step for the other screws, one by one.
GANTRY 6-9
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
6-3 APERTURE Z-AXIS BELT TENSION (CONTINUED)
Illustration 6-3 Z-Axis Belt
Allen Screws Z-Axis Motor Pulley Belt Screw Assy Pulley
Allen Screws Adjustment Bolt
Upper Belt Screw Assy

Pulley
Z–Axis Motor
Pulley Lower Belt
6-10 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 7 - TABLE AND GANTRY
7-1 TABLE POSITIONING

The following procedure adjusts the Table position in the right-left direction so that the Table center line and the scan
center are aligned. (See Illustration 7-1)
After completing the adjustment, anchor the Table; see the Installation manual.

1. Preparation:
c. Remove the right side, top and front covers from the Gantry.
Illustration 7-1 Table Right-left Positioning
GANTRY
Scan Center
TABLE
Right-Left
Table Center Line Direction
GANTRY 7-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
7-1 TABLE POSITIONING (CONTINUED)
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD! 
WHEN YOU PRESS THE ‘POSN LIGHT’ BUTTONS, THE GANTRY QUICKLY ROTATES TO
THE -14 DEG. POSITION. IF IT IS NECESSARY TO PLACE ANY PART OF YOUR BODY
INSIDE OR NEAR THE GANTRY, SWITCH OFF THE ‘CB3’ SWITCH FIRST.
2. Align ISO height.
a. Advance the cradle into the Gantry.
b. Perform an axial scan of the cradle using the following technique:
Scan Parameters: Axial, 1 sec, 120KV, 60mA, 10mm thickness, 43cm FOV
c. Check on the image of distance between the top surface of cradle and gantry ISO center shall be 135cm ±
5mm. If not, adjust the table leaving adjuster to make sure distance are in spec.
135mm
3. Perform an axial scan of the cradle at least 3 points (the front of cradle, the middle of cradle, the end of cradle)
using the following technique:
Scan Parameters: Axial, 3 sec, 120KV, 60mA, 10mm thickness, 43cm FOV
7-2 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
7-1 TABLE POSITIONING (CONTINUED)

4. Check whether the Table center line and the scan center are aligned:
Verify that the difference in the distances ( |1-2| ) is within ± 2 mm. If not, proceed to next step.

1 2
5. Adjust the Table right - left position:

a. Remove the Table covers.
(Refer to the Component Replacement manual, if necessary)
b. Loosen the Table base two mounting bolts. (See Illustration 7-2)
c. Move the Table to center the head holder in the scan plane, according to step 4.
d. Tighten the Table base mounting bolts securely.
e. Return to Step 3.
Illustration 7-2 Table Mounting Screws
Gantry Base
Table Base Mounting Bolt (x2)
GANTRY 7-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
7-2 POSITIONING LIGHTS

System provides the Trans-axial plane and Sagittal plane positioning lights, they are equipped on the Gantry rota-
tional frame. The Trans-axial plane positioning light is 190mm out from scanning plane, the Control Panel will dis-
play ‘190’ if pressing External Landmark button.
Illustration 7-3 Halogen Positioning Lights Locations
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD! WHEN YOU PRESS THE ’POSN LIGHT’ BUTTONS, THE GANTRY
QUICKLY ROTATES TO THE -14 DEG. POSITION. IF IT IS NECESSARY TO PLACE ANY
PART OF YOUR BODY INSIDE OR NEAR THE GANTRY, SWITCH OFF THE ‘CB3’ SWITCH
FIRST.
1. Preparation.
a. Switch OFF the ’CB2’, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
b. Remove the right side, top and front covers from the Gantry.
c. Remove the control display panel from the Gantry front Cover and install it to its service position.
d. Switch ON the ’CB2’ and ‘CB4’ switches at the PDU.
e. Switch ON the ‘Service’ switch on the TGP board.
2. Adjust two laser beams of the positioning lights perpendicular to each other.
a. Press External Landmark button to turn on the positioning lights.
7-4 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
7-2 POSITIONING LIGHTS (CONTINUED)

b. Place a paper printed with crosshairs on the cradle.

Illustration 7-4 Positioning Light Adjustment
Sagittal Plane Positioning Light Trans-axial Plane Positioning Light
b a’
b’
C
D
B
Note: Before adjusting B, C or D, loosen a, a’, b and b’ respectively; after adjustment, tighten
a, a’, b or b’ accordingly.
GANTRY 7-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

c. Slightly loose screw ‘A’ (See Illustration 7-4) and adjust lampshade to verify that cross laser beams of
the positioning lights almost overlap or parallel with optional crosshairs on the paper.
Illustration 7-5 Adjust the Laser Light to Make Beams Perpendicular
Rotate Two Laser Lights

with Hand to make two Beams
Perpendicular to Each Other
Beam X
Beam Z
d. Screw tightly the screw ‘A’ when two laser beams of the positioning lights are vertical each other.
3. Adjust the Laser Beam X to parallel with the JEDI edge.
a. Slightly loose four screws (a, a’, b and b’), respectively. (See Illustration 7-4)
b. Use the JEDI edge as reference line, adjust ‘B’ and ‘C’ to make the Beam X parallels with the JEDI edge.
• Screw ‘B’: make the Beam X parallel with JEDI edge.
• Screw ‘C’: make the Beam X move along Z-axial.
Illustration 7-6 Make the Beam X Parallel with JEDI Edge
7-6 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

c. Screw tightly two screws a and a’ after the Laser Beam X parallels with the JEDI edge.
4. Adjust the Laser Beam X to scanning plane is 190mm.
a. Adjust the screw ‘C’ to confirm the distance is 261mm  1mm between the Laser Beam X and the DAS
Mounting Plate.
Note
Measure both sides (left and right) of the DAS Mounting Plate to ensure the distance is more exact.
Illustration 7-7 Measure the Distance between the DAS Mounting Plate and Beam X

DAS Mounting Plate
Measure Point (x2)
GANTRY 7-7
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

5. Position the steel pin (diameter of 6mm) to approx scan center height with any auxiliaries. (Refer to Illustration
7-8)
Illustration 7-8 Position the Pin
Approx 135mm
a. Perform an axial scan on the steel pin with the following parameter:
3 sec; 120KV; 60mA; 10mm Thickness; 43cm Recon DFOV, x=y=0 (other default).
b. Display a grid.
c. Measure the distance between the pin and the scan center within 0.5mm in the following way:
i. Press the [Crsr] key to display a crosshair cursor.
ii. Move the cursor using the trackball to the center of the pin, and press the [Dist Angle] key to copy the
cursor over the pin location.
iii. Move the cursor vertically to the X axis; press [Dist Angle] again, to deposit the end location and display
the distance between the pin and the X axis. (See Illustration 7-9)
iv. If the distance is not within 0.5mm, adjust height of the auxiliaries and repeat the above steps to po-
sition the steel pin to approx the scan center height.
7-8 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Illustration 7-9 Axial Image of Steel Pin for X Axis

Y

Distance
Pin
6. Adjust the Laser Beam Z to locate in the middle of the Table.

a. Adjust the screw ‘D’ so that the Laser Beam Z is approximately located on the Table middle position.
b. Move the steel pin along the Laser Beam X to overlap the laser beam Z.
c. Perform an axial scan on the steel pin with the following parameter:
3 sec; 120KV; 60mA; 10mm Thickness; 43cm Recon DFOV, x=y=0 (other default).
d. Display a grid.
e. Measure the distance between the pin and the scan center within 0.5mm in the following way:
i. Press the [Crsr] key to display a crosshair cursor.
ii. Move the cursor using the trackball to the center of the pin, and press the [Dist Angle] key to copy the
cursor over the pin location.
iii. Move the cursor vertically to the Y axis; press [Dist Angle] again, to deposit the end location and display
the distance between the pin and the Y axis. (See Illustration 7-10)
Illustration 7-10 Axial Image of Steel Pin for Y Axis

Y
Distance
Pin
GANTRY 7-9
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

iv. If the distance is not within 0.5mm, adjust the screw ‘D’ and repeat the above steps to position the
Laser Beam Z.
Verification of Table Positioning

7. Verify that the Table is installed perpendicular to the Gantry:
a. Perform a scout scan on the 25cm water phantom at 0 deg. azimuth.
The scout image and a horizontal line appear.
b. Verify that the horizontal line and the phantom surface are parallel. (See Illustration 7-11)
Illustration 7-11 Table Positioning Check
Phantom
Horizontal Line
Phantom Surface
8. Advance the cradle to align the position of the water phantom surface to the scan plane:
a. Perform a scout scan on the 25cm water phantom at 90 deg. azimuth.
The scout image and a vertical line appear.
b. Adjust the Laser Beam Z in the horizontal direction using the screw ‘D’ so that the Laser Beam Z and the
phantom surface are aligned according to the image.
c. Repeat Steps a and b, until the vertical line and the phantom surface are parallel.
d. Move the vertical line until it just touches the surface of the phantom scout image.
9. Adjust the Laser Beam Z in the horizontal direction using the screw ‘D’ so that the Laser Beam Z and the
phantom surface are aligned within 0.5mm.
Adjust the light angle, if necessary.
Illustration 7-12 Localize on the Phantom Surface
Phantom Surface
Vertical Line
7-10 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
7-3 GANTRY CONTROL PANEL CHECK
7-3-1 Table In, Out, Fast Key

1. Verify that the cradle moves In and Out smoothly when pressing the ’In’ or ’Out’ button on the Gantry Control
Panel.
2. Press the ’In’ or ’Out’ button together with the ’Fast’ button and verify that the cradle moves smoothly at
approximately twice the speed as in step 2; check both In and Out.
7-3-2 EXLMR Key

Verify press this button to move the anatomy beneath the external positioning light and control display panel show
‘190’.
7-3-3 POSN Light

1. Push the ’POSN Light’ button once.

Verify that the positioning lights rotates to about 12 o’clock position and the positioning lights are turned ON.
(The Gantry does not rotate, if it is already positioned at the 12 o’clock position)

Verify that the positioning lights are turned OFF automatically after approximately 1minute. 

(If the positioning lights are not turned ON, push the reset switch on the TGP Board once and perform the
above)
2. Push the ‘POSN Light’ button twice.

Verify that the positioning lights rotates to about 3 o’clock position and the positioning lights are turned ON.
(The Gantry does not rotate, if it is already positioned at the 3 o’clock position)

Verify that the positioning lights are turned OFF automatically after approximately 1 minute.

(If the positioning lights are not turned ON, push the reset switch on the TGP Board once and perform the
above)
GANTRY 7-11
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
7-12 GANTRY
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
TABLE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - LONGITUDINAL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 CRADLE MECHANICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-1-1 Unlatch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-1-2 Parallel Setting of Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-1-3 Gap between Cradle and Cradle Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Table of Content
1-2 CRADLE RELATIVE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-2-1 Longitudinal Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-2-2 Cradle Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-3 CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-4 OUTPUT TORQUE ADJUSTMENT OF STEPPING MOTOR DRIVER. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
i
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
ii
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 1 - LONGITUDINAL FUNCTION
1-1 CRADLE MECHANICS
1-1-1 Unlatch Switches

To perform the following procedure, a person should ride on the cradle, or some substitute should be placed on the
cradle.
SECTION 1 - LONGITUDINAL
1. Move the cradle to the Out limit position by the ‘OUT’ button.
2. While moving the cradle in the In direction by continuously pushing the ‘IN’ button, perform the following:
FUNCTION
a. Push the Unlatch Switch (‘Free’). (See Illustration 1-1)

Verify that the cradle stops moving, and that the Gantry Display goes to blink; this indicating that the cradle
is unlatched.
b. Push the Unlatch Switch again (‘Latch’).
c. Release the ‘IN’ button, and then push it.

Verify that the cradle starts moving and the Gantry Display changes to normal (displaying a position in mil-
limeter).
3. Repeat the above same check for the Unlatch switch on the opposite side.
Illustration 1-1 Unlatch Switch Location
Front Rear
One Unlatch Switch per Side
TABLE 1-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-1-2 Parallel Setting of Cradle

1. Remove the Table right and left top covers.
2. Move the cradle to the Mechanical Out limit position by hand.
3. Adjust the position of the bearings to meet the following conditions. (See Illustration 1-2)
• The Table frame and the cradle are parallel; adjust so that the difference between gap DF (measured on
the In side) and gap DR (measured on the Out side) becomes 1.5 mm or less.
• A gap of 0.1 mm or more (‘A’) exists between the cradle and the bearing (at least one of the right and
left bearings); however, the total of the gaps on the right and left sides should be 2.5 mm or less.
Illustration 1-2 Gap Between Frame and Cradle
FRAME
DR DF
CRADLE
Gantry
FRAME
A
BEARING
1-2 TABLE
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-1-3 Gap between Cradle and Cradle Support

1. Remove the Table right and left top covers.
2. Move the cradle to the Out limit position by hand.
3. Measure the distances “AR” and “AL” , and write them down with the first decimal place.
4. Remove the screw, then adjust the gap between the cradle and the cradle support bearing by using the shim,
so that the gap becomes 0.5 ± 0.1mm.
5. Adjust the position of the cradle support to meet the ’AR’ and ’AL’ recorded at Step 3., and tighten the screw.
Illustration 1-3 Gap between Cradle and Cradle Support

TOP VIEW AL
FUNCTION
Bearing
Roller Bearing
SIDE VIEW AR
0.5mm+/-
+ 0.1mm
Cradle Bearing
Shim
Roller
Cradle Support
AR(AL) Screw
TABLE 1-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-2 CRADLE RELATIVE POSITION

The following procedures (’Longitudinal Accuracy’ and ’Cradle Repeatability’) check the encoder and its related
mechanics and electrics.
1-2-1 Longitudinal Accuracy
Out to In Travel
1. Move the cradle to the Mechanical Out limit position by hand.
2. Continue to press the ’EXLMR’ button more than 2 seconds and then release it, and verify that the Gantry
Display indicates ‘0’.
3. Mark the Table cover with a marking tape or other at one end of the cradle. Define this position as a reference.
4. Move the cradle to 1000 mm (Display) by pushing the ‘IN’ button (use the slow speed).
5. Measure the actual distance of cradle movement.

Verify that the measurement is 1000 ± 1 mm.
In to Out Travel
6. Move the cradle to the Mechanical In limit position by hand.
9. Move the cradle to 1000 mm (Display) by pushing the ’OUT’ button (use the slow speed).
10. Measure the actual distance of cradle movement.

Verify that the measurement is 1000 ± 1 mm.
1-4 TABLE
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-2-2 Cradle Repeatability
Out to In Travel
1. Move the cradle to Mechanical Out limit position by hand.
2. Move the cradle approximately 100 mm, by pushing ’IN’ button.
5. Move the cradle to 1000 mm (Display) by pushing the ’IN’ button (use the slow speed).
7. Measure the cradle position difference between before and after the travels.

Verify that the measurement is 0 ± 0.25 mm.
FUNCTION
In to Out Travel
8. Move the cradle to its Mechanical In limit position by hand.
9. Move the cradle approximately 100 mm, by pushing ’OUT’ button.
13. Move the cradle to 0 mm (Display) by pushing the ’IN’ button (use the slow speed).
14. Measure the cradle position difference between before and after the travels.

Verify that the measurement is 0 ± 0.25 mm.
TABLE 1-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-3 CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION
Check
1. Press ’OUT’ key and ’FAST’ key on the gantry control and display panel to move the cradle to out limit position.
2. Press ‘EXLM’ more than 2 seconds.
3. Press latch button and move the Cradle by hand to mechanical out limit position, them press latch again.
4. Check that the position display indicates “5.0 ± 2.5”.
5. If not, perform the adjustment procedure, on the next page.
6. Move the cradle to in limit position by pressing ’IN’ and ’FAST’ keys.
7. Press ’IN’ key again for few seconds.
8. Check that the position display indicates “1520 ± 5.0”.
9. If not, perform adjustment.
1-6 TABLE
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-3 CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION (CONTINUED)
Cradle Absolute Position (OUT Limit Adjustment)

If the Cradle position is out of specification, proceed as shown below.
1. Unlatch the Table.
2. Move the cradle to the mechanical out limit position by hand. (farthest from gantry).
Illustration 1-4 TGP Board
DATA CHG LED
ON
RST
OFF
T1 T6 T8 TEST1
DS9
FUNCTION
TEST2
JP2 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

S1
S5
3. Set the T6 switch of the TGP S1 switch to ON (illustration 1-4).

4. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board, until the display on the Gantry Display indicates ’--003’.
5. Verify that the position display indicates ’0’, then push TEST2 switch on the TGP board (illustration 1-4).
6. DATA CHG LED should become ON, press ‘EXLM’ and ‘FAST’ keys together on the control panel for a few
seconds; wait a few seconds after ‘EXLM’ and ‘FAST’ are released, DATA CHG LED should become off.
(illustration 1-4). 

If DATA CHG LED can NOT become ON after pushing TEST2 switch, it indicates the Cradle Potentiometer is
at fault, please replace the Cradle Potentiometer.
TABLE 1-7
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Cradle Absolute Position (IN Limit Adjustment)

1. Verify that the cradle is still at mechanical out limit position.
2. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board, until the dispay on the Gantry Display indicates ‘--004’.
3. Latch the Table.
4. Verify that the position display indicates ‘0’. Then move the cradle in by pushing ‘IN’ button until the position
display indicated ‘3040 ± 10’. (NOTE: Don’t push ‘FAST’ at the same time)
5. Push TEST2 switch on the TGP board.
6. DATA CHG LED should become ON, press ‘EXLM’ and ‘FAST’ keys together on the control panel for a few
seconds; wait a few seconds after ‘EXLM’ and ‘FAST’ are released, DATA CHG LED should become OFF.

If DATA CHG LED can NOT become ON after pushing TEST2 switch, it indicates the Cradle Potentiometer is
at fault, please replace the Cradle Potentiometer.
Finish Test
1. Set the T6 switch of the TGP S1 switch from ON to OFF.
2. Reset TGP.
1-8 TABLE
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-4 OUTPUT TORQUE ADJUSTMENT OF STEPPING MOTOR DRIVER

The following procedure adjusts the stepping motor output torque after proceeding step motor driver’s replacement.
Tools and Special Equipment

• Multimeter
• Ergometer or Mechanical Fishing Scale
• Screwdriver
1. Move the cradle to the out limit position by hand.
2. Place a weight (object or person) of approximately 180kg on the cradle.
3. Set the spring balance to the cradle end as indicated in the illustration 1-5.
FUNCTION
Illustration 1-5 Setting the Spring balance
Fishing Scale
TABLE 1-9
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-4 OUTPUT TORQUE ADJUSTMENT OF STEPPING MOTOR DRIVER (CONTINUED)

4. Set the T6 switch of the TGP S1 switch to ON position (illustration 1-4).
5. Move the cradle OUT to its fully retracted position (farthest from Gantry).
6. Set the speed of cradle at 0.5 mm/sec by proceeding the Table Processor Off-line Test No.’020’, which sets
the cradle travel speed to 0.25 to 15mm/sec in increments of 0.25 mm/sec, press Fast and In button to increase
speed, press Fast and Out button to decrease speed.
Note
The actual cradle speed equals to (the data displayed on controlpanel/10). For example, if the data
displayed on control panel is 100, the actual speed is 100/10=10mm/sec. Press FAST and IN but-
tons simultaneously at Test No. 020 will increase the speed by 0.25mm/sec, while press FAST and
OUT buttons simultaneously will decrease the speed by 0.25mm/sec.
7. Push IN switch on the front control panel.
8. Measure the voltage between the test point I_REF and test point GND on Step Motor Driver with multimeter.
(red test lead on I_REF and black test lead on GND). Limit the stepping motor output ‘torque’ between 186N ~
196N (19Kgf.cm ~ 20Kgf.cm) by adjusting the VR4 with screwdriver; the measuring voltage of multimeter is about
1.797DC Volts.
Method of measuring the stepping motor output torque:
a. Tie a rope without elastic in the middle of the cradle handle at the rear of the cradle;
b. Catch the rope with ergometer;
c. Move the cradle IN, pull the ergometer at the opposite cradle moving direction, measure the maximal torque
value of the ergometer at the cradle halt point.
9. Set the speed of cradle at 20 mm/sec by proceeding the Table Processor Off-line Test No.’014’, which sets the
cradle travel speed to 2 to 150mm/sec in increments of 2 mm/sec.
10. Set all the switches of the TGP S1 switch to OFF position (illustration 1-4).
11. Push ‘IN’ switch on the front control panel.
12. Measure the voltage between the test point I_REF and test point GND on Step Motor Driver with multimeter
(red test lead on I_REF and black test lead on GND). Limit the stepping motor output ‘torque’ between 186N ~
196N (19Kgf ~20Kgf) by adjusting the VR5 with screwdriver; the measuring voltage of multimeter is about
1.9DC Volts.
The position of test point----I_REF, GND and variable resistor---VR4, VR5 shown below.
Illustration 1-6 Stepping Motor Driver
5326177
13. END
1-10 TABLE
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
DAS/DETECTOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - DAS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 DAS PATTERN DATA FROM DCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 DAS PATTERN DATA FROM CONVERTER BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-3 DAS OFFSET DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
SECTION 2 - DC POWER SUPPLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Table of Content
2-1 DC POWER SUPPLY (5323970). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
i
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
ii
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 1 - DAS OPERATION
1-1 DAS PATTERN DATA FROM DCP

1. Select DAS Pattern Data From DCP; refer to below:
Service  Diagnostics  Das Data Transfer

2. Select or specify the following test parameters:
Data :DCP

Test Mode :Bit by Bit: Normal
Scan Mode :Rotate Scan
Scan Time :(Select the shortest time available on the system.)
No. of Scan :20
No. of Test :2
Until errors occur. :1
3. Execute the test.

Verify that no error occurred.
DAS/DETECTOR 1-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-2 DAS PATTERN DATA FROM CONVERTER BOARD

1. Select DAS Pattern Data From Converter Board; refer to below:
Service  Diagnostics
2. Select or specify the following test parameters:
Data :CNV
Test Mode :Bit by Bit: Normal
Scan Mode :Rotate Scan
No. of Scan :20
No. of Test :2
Until errors occur. :1
3. Execute the test.

Verify that no error occurred.
Note
The 695-736ch might have the random pattern because they are the channels for debug or dummy
channels.
1-2 DAS/DETECTOR
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-3 DAS OFFSET DATA
Precondition
Ensure that the DAS/Detector has been powered ON for at least ten minutes prior to performing the following
procedure.
1. Perform an axial scan with no x-rays (i.e., acquire a raw data file consisting of offset data):
Service  Diagnostics Offline Scan

b. Select Axial from ‘Technic - [Scan Type]’.

c. Perform the following scan:
XG, Ray :OFF
Rotor :OFF
(Others) :(defaults)
2. Verify that Mean and SD data are within specifications without applying Offset File Correction on the acquired
raw data (active data):

b. Only for Dual Slice System, select A side. (A channel)
c. Select the raw data file (Acq No: 1) from the Raw data browser lists.
d. Perform Fan Data with the following settings:
Offset File Correction No

e. Select Active Mean from Select Type Data; then perform Store to File.
f. Save vector with the following settings:
Enter Mean Vector Number [1..32] 1

Enter File Comment Mean
Select OK to save vector; select OK to return.

g. Select Analysis; Select View Vector.
h. View vector 1 from the Select SupMean File.
DAS/DETECTOR 1-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-3 DAS OFFSET DATA (CONTINUED)

i. Select Plot and set the Manual Select value with the following settings:
Minimum 100
Maximum 1000
Verify that Active Mean data is within specifications as described below:
Ch1~Ch42 Ch43~Ch615, Ch686~Ch691, Ch616~Ch685

Ch693~Ch695
Active Mean 170~250 350~500 170~250
j. Repeat a, b, c.
k. Select Active SD from Select Type Data; then perform Store to File.
l. Save vector with the following setting:

Enter File Comment SD
m. Select Analysis; Select View Vector.

n. View vector 1 from the Select SupMean File.
o. Select Plot and set the Manual Select value with the following settings:
Minimum 0
Maximum 10
Verify that Active SD data is within specifications as described below:
Ch1~Ch42 Ch43~Ch615 Ch616~Ch685 Ch686~Ch691 Ch693~Ch695

Active SD 0~6 0~8 0~6 0~8 0~8
p. Only for Dual Slice System, repeat Step 2 for B side. (B channel)
1-4 DAS/DETECTOR
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

3. Verify that Mean and SD data are within specifications, by performing Offset File Correction on the acquired
raw data (active data):

c. Select the raw data file (Acq No: 1) from the Raw data browser lists.
d. Perform Fan Data with the following settings:

e. Select Active Mean from Select Type Data; then perform Store to File.
f. Save vector with the following settings:

Enter File Comment Mean
Select OK to save vector; select OK to return.

g. Select Analysis; Select View Vector.
h. View vector 1 from the Select SupMean File.
i. Select Plot and set the Manual Select value with the following settings:
Minimum -4
Maximum +4
Verify that Active Mean data is within specifications as described below:
Ch1~Ch691 Ch693~695
Active Mean -4~+4 -4~+4
DAS/DETECTOR 1-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

j. Repeat a, b, c.
k. Select Active SD from Select Type Data; then perform Store to File.
l. Save vector with the following setting:

Enter File Comment SD
m. Select Analysis; Select View Vector.

n. View vector 1 from the Select SupMean File.
o. Select Plot and set the Manual Select value with the following settings:
Minimum 0
Maximum 10
Verify that Active SD data is within specifications as described below::
Ch1~Ch42 Ch43~Ch615 Ch616~Ch685 Ch686~Ch691 Ch693~Ch695

Active SD 0~6 0~8 0~6 0~8 0~8
p. Only for Dual Slice System, repeat Step 3 for B side. (B channel)
1-6 DAS/DETECTOR
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-1 DC POWER SUPPLY (5323970)

1. Remove the left side cover from the Gantry.
2. Remove the right side cover from the Gantry.

4. Rotate the Gantry to approximately 190 tube position by hand.
5. Insert the Azimuth lock pin.
6. Remove the Power Supply Cover by unscrewing six nuts. (See Illustration 2-1)
8. Measure if necessary, the potentiometers of the Power Supply according to the Table 2-1. The potentiometer
positions is shown in the Illustration 2-2.
Illustration 2-1 Power Supply PS L Voltage Adjustment (5323970)

Nut (x6)
5V 24V RTN
Coll Power
1 4 7 10 Cable
24V
5V RTN 2 5 8 11
3 6 9 12
24V 24V RTN
OGP POWER CABLE CONNECTOR DAS Power OGP Power Cable

Cable
+5V_A +5V_L
RF XMT Cable
1 4 7
AGND DGND 24V 0V
2 5 8 0V_L
0V_A
3 6 9 0V 24V
24V 1 2 0V 4 3 2 1
ment - 5136907ADW_r1.pdf Page 2 of 2
GND
-5V_A
DAS POWER CABLE CONNECTOR COLLIMATOR CABLE CONNECTOR RF XMT CABLE CONNECTOR
DAS/DETECTOR 2-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-1 DC POWER SUPPLY FOR GDAS (5323970) (CONTINUED)
Illustration 2-2 Potentiometer Position of PS
Table 2-1 Power Supply Specifications
No. Rated Out Voltage Voltage Range (without Load)

1 + 5V_L +5.10 +/-0.1V
2 + 5V_A +5.05 +/-0.1V
3 -5V_A -5.10 +/-0.1V
4 + 24V +24.10 +/-0.1V
2-2 DAS/DETECTOR
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
X-RAY GENERATOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - X-RAY TUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 DAS COUNT CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 GENERATOR CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
SECTION 2 - KV AND MA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Table of Content
2-1 KV & MA CHECK WITH GANTRY DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2 KV CHECK WITH HV DIVIDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-3 MA CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
i
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
ii
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 1 - X-RAY TUBE
1-1 DAS COUNT CHECK

This check verifies that the x-ray tube dose falls within specifications by checking DAS Counts.
This check should be performed when the x-ray tube is replaced.
1. Perform a stationary scan (air scan):
SECTION 1 - X-RAY TUBE

c. Perform the following air scan:
Scan Time :1.5 Sec
Thickness :10 mm
KV :120 kV
MA :60 mA
(Others) :(defaults)

Bow-tie filter: Installed
2. Verify that MEAN MAX data is within specifications:
Service  Generic System Analyzer (GSA)  Format Raw Data
c. Select the raw data file (Exam#1, Series#1, Acq No: 1) from the Raw data browser lists.

The ‘Fan Data Averages’ screen are displayed:

e. Select Active Mean as “Select Type of Data:”.
f. Select Store to File.
XG 1-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-1 DAS COUNT CHECK (CONTINUED)

g. Enter 1 as “Mean Vector Number” and DAS count check as “File Comment”, then click on OK.
h. The Attention window might appears. Click on OK.
i. Select Analysis  View Vector.
j. Select MeanFile 1- DAS Count check.
k. Click on Plot, then OK.
Illustration 1-1 Max of Active Mean
l. Verify that Max of Active Mean data is within specifications as described below:
Note
You can also display the data as a numerics using Numerical button.
- Max of Active Mean: 750000   1250000
3. For Dual Slice System, repeat steps 2 for B Side (B channel).
1-2 GENERATOR CALIBRATION

The x-ray generator of this CT system requires no calibration after an x-ray tube is replaced.
Differences in characteristics of each x-ray tube are automatically learned by the generator, and the learned data
will be stored within the generator.
1-2 XG
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 2 - KV AND MA
2-1 KV & MA CHECK WITH GANTRY DISPLAY

1. Preparation:
b. Set the QA phantom to the phantom holder.
c. Move the cradle to position the phantom at the Detector window.
(This is to protect the Detector by reducing x-ray dose to it during the check procedure)
d. Perform Warm-up scans, if the x-ray tube is cold.
e. Wait five minutes or more following the last scan prior to proceeding to the next step.
2. Set the T5 switch of dip switch S1 to ON on the TGP Board.
(kV & mA display mode on Gantry Display)
3. Perform scans of kV - mA stations specified in Table 2-1, following the steps below, and verify that the kV and
mA values displayed on the Gantry Display is within the following specifications:
kV: 5 kV
mA: 20 mA
c. Set the scan parameters according to Table 2-1.
(kV and mA values are displayed in real-time during an exposure, and ‘0’ is displayed after the exposure is
finished)
Table 2-1 kV - mA Stations
Time Thickness kV mA
1.5 or 2.0 sec 5 mm 120 20 40 60 100 160 200
(Display*) 2012 4012 6012 10012 16012 20012
140 20 40 60 100 160 -
(Display*) 2014 4014 6014 10014 16014
Stationary Scan (Present Degree)
(Other scan parameters): (defaults)
*: Example, kV=120kV 20mA, display will be ‘2012’. That means mA and kV/10 value.
4. Set the T5 switch of dip switch S1 to OFF on the TGP Board.
XG 2-1
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-2 KV CHECK WITH HV DIVIDER

1. Preparation:
a. Perform Warm-up scans, if the x-ray tube is cold.
b. Remove the left side cover of the Gantry.
c. Switch OFF the ‘CB3’, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the PDU.
d. Remove the right side, top and front covers from the Gantry.
e. Rotate the Gantry to the home position (x-ray tube at the 12 o’clock position).
CAUTION
Electric shock! Use a ground bar to discharge the high voltage connector any time you
disconnect it.
2. Connect an HV divider between the x-ray tube and the HV Tank:
Illustration 2-1 HV Divider Connection

X-Ray Tube
HV Divider
HV Tank
2-2 XG
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-2 KV CHECK WITH HV DIVIDER (CONTINUED)

a. Connecting the HV Cables to the HV Tank:
i. Remove the HV cable connectors from the HV Tank (both anode and cathode connectors).
ii. Connect the HV divider cables, which are installed in the system, to the HV Tank.
(Before connecting the cables, wipe clean the HV connectors, and lubricate them with silicon oil)
b. Connecting the HV Divider to the X-Ray Tube:
i. Rotate the Gantry by hand until the X-Ray Tube reaches the 3 o’clock position.
ii. Remove the HV cable connectors from the x-ray tube. (Both anode and cathode connectors)
iii. Connect the HV divider cables whose other ends are connected to the HV divider to the x-ray tube.
c. Placing the HV Divider on the Floor:
i. Rotate the Gantry by hand until the X-Ray Tube reaches the 3 o’clock position.
ii. Place the HV divider on the floor without straining the HV cables.
d. Connecting the HV Cables to the HV Divider:
i. Connect the HV divider cables which were connected to the tanks at step a to the HV divider (see
Illustrations 2-1 and 2-2).
Illustration 2-2 HV Tank Position
X-Ray Tube
HV Tank
XG 2-3
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-2 KV CHECK WITH HV DIVIDER (CONTINUED)
kV Read
3. Connect a digital multimeter to the output terminals of the HV divider.
(The multimeter should be in the DC voltage measurement mode)
Place the multimeter so that it can be read from the Operator’s room.
NOTICE
Do not switch ON the Rotate switch (CB3) at the PDU.
4. Perform x-ray exposures and read the kV values:
a. Switch ON the ‘CB3’, ‘CB4‘ and ‘XG Power‘ switches at the PDU.
b. Perform scans described in Table 2-2, following the steps below, and verify that the kV readings are within
the specifications.
i. Select Offline Scan; refer to below:
ii. Select Stationary from ‘Technic - [Scan Type]‘.
iii. Set the scan parameters according to Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 kV Check Scans
kV mA kV Specification
120 200 111.6   128.4
140 160 130.2   149.8
Scan Time: 3.0 sec
Thickness: 2mm
Focus: Large
(Others): (defaults)
2-4 XG
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-3 MA CHECK
1. Preparation:
a. Perform Warm-up scans, if the x-ray tube is cold.
b. Wait five minutes or more following the last scan prior to proceeding to the next step.
c. Wait at least 2 minutes, remove the left side cover of the Gantry.
d. Switch OFF the ‘CB3‘, ‘CB4’ and ‘XG Power‘ switches at the PDU.
e. Remove the Gantry covers except the rear cover.
f. Rotate the Gantry by hand in the clockwise direction until the x-ray is positioned at the 12 o’clock position.
Load Resister Check
2. To access the resistor (SH3, SH4) on the kV Measure Board, remove the power unit cover from the JEDI Power
Unit.
3. Connect a digital multimeter probes to the resistor (SH3 or SH4) or yellow capacitor (C8) leads on the kV
Measure board, located behind the kV Cont board.(see illustration 2-3).
4. Set the multimeter to the register measurement mode.
Read the value; it should be 5 ( 0.05) ohms.
Illustration 2-3 kV Measure Board Location
SH3
SH4
C8
Unit Cover SH3, SH4, or C8
KV Measure Board
Probes
KV Cont Board
XG 2-5
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-3 MA CHECK (CONTINUED)
mA Check
5. Set the multimeter to the DC voltage measurement mode (mV).
Place the multimeter so that it can be read from the Operator’s room.
NOTICE
Do not switch ON the Rotate switch (CB3) at the PDU.
6. Perform x-ray exposures and read the voltage values:
a. Switch ON the ‘CB3’, ‘CB4‘ and ‘XG Power‘ switches at the PDU.
b. Perform scans described in Table 2-3, following the steps below, and verify that the mA measurements
([measured voltage (mV)]/[5 (ohms)]) are within the specifications.
i. Select Offline Scan; refer to below:
ii. Select Stationary from ‘Technic - [Scan Type]‘.
iii. Set the scan parameters according to Table 2-3.
Table 2-3 mA Check Scans
kV mA mA Specification
120 200 190.0   210.0
140 160 152.0   168.0
Scan Time: 3.0 sec
Thickness: 2mm
Focus: Large
(Others): (defaults)
2-6 XG
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING OF BOARDS/DEVICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - OPERATOR CONSOLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 SCAN CONTROL BOX (SCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
SECTION 2 - GANTRY/TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Table of Content
2-1 TGP (5310990) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2 OGP (5322679) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-3 DTB (5270966). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-4 TEMP CONT ASSY (2171572-2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-5 S-DISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-6 AXIAL DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
SECTION 3 - DAS / DETECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 DCP BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
SECTION 4 - X-RAY GENERATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 KV MEASURE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-1-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-1-2 Switches and Jumpers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-1-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2 FILAMENT BOARD 1 INV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-3 ROTATION BOARD HIGH SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-3-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-3-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-3-4 J2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-4 LV POWER SUPPLY 3 PH BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-4-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-4-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-5 GATE COMMAND BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-5-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-5-3 Fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-6 DUAL SNUB BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-6-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-6-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
i
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
4-7 IF BOARD NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-7-2 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-8 KV CONTROL BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-8-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-8-2 4Switches and Jumpers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-8-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-8-4 Non Volatile RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-9 AC/DC THREE PHASE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-9-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-9-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
SECTION 5 - PDU (POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5-1 RMT CNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
ii
Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 1 - OPERATOR CONSOLE
1-1 GENERAL
WARNING

NOTICE
Cut power (CB7) at the PDU before removing or inserting any of the boards or plugs.
Illustration 1-1 OC Component
AutoVoice
COM/USB
Scan Box
Ethernet
over RJ45
OC
COM+Sound Patient
Dr Sound
+Command Sound
DTB TGP
1-2 SCAN CONTROL BOX (SCB)
Illustration 1-2 SCB
SWITCH / JUMPER 1-1

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-2 SCAN CONTROL BOX (SCB) (CONTINUED)

The Jumper/LED interface can be accessed through the service window on the rear of the SCB.
Illustration 1-3 Service Window

Rear of SCB
Service Window
Jumper
• JD1and JD2 - Minimum Intercom Volume - Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
Jumper Setting Description

JD1 ON (Default) When the volume dial on the keyboard is set to the minimum
(For OC speaker) end, the OC speaker volume becomes zero.
OFF Though the volume dial on the keyboard is set to the minimum
end, the OC speaker volume does not go down beyond a set
minimum level.
JD2 ON (Default) When the volume dial on the keyboard is set to the minimum
(For Gantry end, the Gantry speaker volume becomes zero.
speaker) OFF Though the volume dial on the keyboard is set to the minimum
end, the Gantry speaker volume does not go down beyond a
set minimum level.
1-2 SWITCH / JUMPER

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
1-2 SCAN CONTROL BOX (SCB) (CONTINUED)

• JD3, JD4 and JD5 - Talk on SW - Normally set as described in Table below.
ON OFF

JD3, JD4, JD3: ON Talk-on always put up
JD5 JD4, JD5: OFF
JD4: ON Talk-on switch on the keyboard is used for the intercom
JD3, JD5: OFF function (Default)
JD5: ON Talk-on switch is set to OFF
JD3, JD4: OFF
• JD6 - Safety Loop Control - Normally set as illustrated below.

JD6
Pin Setting Description

1, 2 ON (Normal) Enable software to control the safety loop
2, 3 ON Safety loop always connect
OFF Safety loop always disconnect
Note: When pin 2&3 is ON and DS19 lights, the SCB safetyloop is ok.
• J9 - FPGA AS download connector

Used for updating FPGA firmware. Connect altera USB blaster to this port.
• JD10 and JD11 - TGP Communication - Normally set as illustrated below.

JD10 & JD11 OFF (Normal) The OC communicates with the TGP board.
ON When the OC alone is used (not connected with the
TGP board), the message transmission and receive
are jumpered with these settings.
• JD12 - Gantry voice detect enable.
Setting Description
ON (Defalut) The Gantry voice is amplified out when voice is detected.
OFF The Gantry voice is always amplified out to SCB speaker.
SWITCH / JUMPER 1-3

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
1-4 SWITCH / JUMPER

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 2 - GANTRY/TABLE
2-1 TGP (5310990)
Illustration 2-1 TGP Jumpers & Switches
SECTION 2- GANTRY/TABLE
SW6 RST
DS17
DS18
DS19
SW8 TEST1
DS22
DS20
DS12 DS7 DS3

DS4
DS9
DS21 DS13 DS2
DS10 DS6 DS1

DS5
SW7 TEST2
DS8
DS15
DS11
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
JP2 SVON SYS JOG FAST
DS14
OFF
S1 OFF
SVOFF MNL CNT SLOW

S5
ON OFF
SW9 ERST
SWITCH / JUMPER 2-1

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-1 TGP (5310990) (CONTINUED)
Jumper
• JP2 - Normally set as described in Table below.
JP2
DETECT NOT DETECT

JP2 1-2 NOT DETECTED, TGP will not detect emergency stop
button and always work normally. Used for off-line test,
debug and staging.
2-3 (Normal) DETECTED, TGP will detect emergency stop button.
Emergency signal lines are monitored to decelerate the
cradle during the emergency stop. Used for BD off-line test
and debug.
Dip Switches
• S5 - This switch is used to select JTAG chain component, normally set as illustrated below.
S5
ON OFF
Table 2-1 S5 Description
Pin Setting Description

bit0 On FPGA+CPLD (Normal)
bit1~bit3 Off
bit0 Off FPGA+CPLD+PHY
bit1~bit3 On
2-2 SWITCH / JUMPER

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Table 2-2 S1
Switch Setting Description
(Default)
S1 T1 OFF Enable reset OGP
T2 OFF Load driver par
T3 OFF DV_EN_MASK (when svon, this download firmware to axial driver)
T4 OFF Allow footprint change
T5 OFF Display Xray MAKV
T6 OFF Offline test mode
T7 OFF DTB_ERROR_MASK
T8 OFF BOOT OR APPL SELECTION
SWITCH / JUMPER 2-3

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Service Switches
The following four switches on the TGP board provide off-line control of gantry rotation.
Note
Repeated acceleration and deceleration operations of the gantry over a limited period of time with
these service switches may cause an Overload Alarm state or overheating of the energy dissipation
resistor in the servo amplifier.
When doing the operations, take a pause of approximately 20 seconds before changing the speed.
Table 2-3 Service Switches
SWITCH SWITCH POSITION FUNCTION

SW1 SVON The axial driver would be disabled, and the Gantry can be rotated by
SVON (Service ON) hand manually.
SVOFF The axial driver would be enabled, and external force can’t pull the
SVOFF (Service OFF) Gantry, Gantry can rotate only by OC instruction or service switches.
SW2 SYS When the SW1 is in SVOFF state, only instruction from OC can make
SYS (System Mode) Gantry rotate. SW3 and SW4 can’t make Gantry rotate under this
condition.
MNL When the SW1 is in SVOFF state, TGP will not response to OC
MNL
(Manual Mode) instruction. SW3 and SW4 can make Gantry rotate under this
condition.
JOG This switch is a spring load switch. When the switch toggled to this
SW3 (JOG Rotation) position, Gantry shall rotate continuously under the speed setting of
SW4. When release this switch, Gantry rotation will stop.
JOG
OFF TGP would give axial driver 0 rpm speed command and motor will
OFF stop rotation.
CNT CNT Gantry will rotate according to the speed setting of SW4.
(Continuous Rotation)
SW4  Gantry will rotate with speed 1.0sec/Rev.
FAST FAST
SLOW
SLOW Gantry will rotate with speed 5.0sec/Rev.
Push Switches
• SW6 - RESET: Resets the TGP.
• SW7 - TEST1: For system test and field engineer use.
• SW8 - TEST2: For system test and field engineer use.
• SW9 - ERST (Emergency Reset): When power supply for the gantry and table is cut off by an emergency
switch, the switch SW9 restores the power supply.
2-4 SWITCH / JUMPER

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-2 OGP (5322679)
Illustration 2-2 OGP
Reset Power
S2
J4
OFF ON
S3
U26 U17
OFF ON
S4
U16
CN5
CN8 CN9 CN6
• J4 - only for firmware debugging, normally set open state.

• S3, S4 - only for firmware debugging, normally set as illustrated below.
ON
S3
JTAG chain Code Lab Mode

ON ON
S4
Ignore
SWITCH / JUMPER 2-5

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-3 DTB (5270966)
Illustration 2-3 DTB Board
DS24
DS23
DS22
DS21
DS20
DS19
DS18
DS17
DS16
DS15
DS14
DS13
DS12
DS10
DS11
DS9
DS8
DS7
DS6
DS5
DS4
DS3
DS2
DS1
J4
DS25 S1 J3
J2
J1
SW1
Reset
• S1 - Set as described in table below
Bit Usage NAME Value FUNCTION

Off 1 Not used
Bit 1
On 0 MFG test LED (same flicker/light with OC_COMM)
Off 1 Not used
Bit 2
On 0 MFG test safety loop/Xray_in signals
Off 1 Not used
Bit 3
On 0 Not used
Off 1 Not used
Bit 4
On 0 Not used
2-6 SWITCH / JUMPER

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-4 TEMP CONT ASSY (2171572-2)
Illustration 2-4 TEMP CONT Assy
CN4
J1
S1
CN3 CN2 CN1
• J1 - Use to download the firmware program to flash on MCU chip.

Note
After the download is completed, this jumper will not be installed on the Temp Cont Board.
SWITCH / JUMPER 2-7

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-5 S-DISP
Illustration 2-5 S-DISP Board
• JP1 - only for function selection
Jumper Description
Open: Normal mode
JP1
Close: Test mode
S-DISP can implement different functions according to the jumper JP1’s state. If jumper JP1 is open, S-
DISP enters normal mode to implement the function. If jumper JP1 is closed, S-DISP enters test mode
to implement the test function. In test mode, S-DISP ignores the control signals transferred from TGP
and can control the indicators or displays according to the different key input as follow:
Table 2-4 Function Key Display Table
Function Key Content of Display Description

PLSW 8 7-seg display 1 shows symbol “8”
INR 8 7-seg display 2 shows symbol “8”
FAST 8 7-seg display 3 shows symbol “8”
OUTR 8 7-seg display 4 shows symbol “8”
EXLMR 8 7-seg display 5 shows symbol “8”
PLSW+INR * S-light is illuminated
PLSW+FAST * I-light is illuminated
DP of display 4 and display 4 are
PLSW+OUTR *
illuminated
PLSW+EXLMR * X-ray indicator is illuminated
Note
*: The symbol “+” indicates the two keys should be pressed simultaneously. (
2-8 SWITCH / JUMPER

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
2-6 AXIAL DRIVE
Illustration 2-6 Axial Drive
S13 S12
S2
S1 S11
Switches Function Setting

S1 Axial Drive encoder equivalent output resolution 0
S2 Reserved S2-1 ~ S2-4: down
S11 Axial Drive CAN address 2
S12 Axial Drive CAN address 0
Axial Drive Can Baud Rate S13-1: down
S13
S13-2 ~ S13-4: up
SWITCH / JUMPER 2-9

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
2-10 SWITCH / JUMPER

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 3 - DAS / DETECTOR
3-1 DCP BOARD
Illustration 3-1 Jumper for DCP Board
J1
SECTION 3 - DAS/DETECTOR
J3
OFF
ON
DS1 DS2
J4
DS3 SW1 J5
DS5 DS6 DS4
Switch
• SW1 - Normally set as illustrated below.
SW1
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SWITCH / JUMPER 3-1

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-1 DCP BOARD (CONTINUED)

Switch NO. Definition
OFF: Normal data from converter card (Default)
1
ON: Converter card pattern data
OFF: Normal data from converter card (Default)
2
ON: DCP FPGA pattern data
OFF: Normal Mode (Default)
3
ON: Bootloader Mode
OFF: Normal Mode (Default)
4
ON: Test Mode Enable
OFF: Dual Slice in test mode (Default)
5
ON: Single Slice in test mode
OFF: Use Flash (Default)
6
ON: Use debug RAM for trace32
OFF: Reserved (Default)
7
ON: Reversed
OFF: Use debug RAM for trace32
8
ON: Use Flash (Default)
Note
SW1-5 is only effective when SW1-4 is ON state (in test mode).
3-2 SWITCH / JUMPER

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
3-1 DCP BOARD (CONTINUED)

Jumper
• J3, J4 and J5 - set as illustrated below
Open Close
Jumper State Definition
SECTION 3 - DAS/DETECTOR
Open (default) IEEE
J3 (JTAG)
Close ICE debug
J4, J5 Open (default) Boundary scan test disable
(BScan SEL) Close Boundary scan test enable
LED
• LEDs - set as table below
Table 3-1 DCP Board LED Description
LED Name Description Color

DS6 Heart Beat Flash at a certain frequency to indicate that DCP is Green
Flash running
Flash at 1KHz: DCP is in application mode
Flash at 2KHz: DCP is in bootloader mode
DS5 Power +3.3V digital supply voltage Green
DS4 Error Flash--When any error occurs in DCP Board Yellow
(Error Code, See Table 3-2)
DS3 Reserved
DS2 Reserved
DS1 CAN receiver status Green
SWITCH / JUMPER 3-3

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
Table 3-2 Error Code Description
Error Code Error Name Description

Not Flash No error
1 CNV_PING_ERR Not all CNVs work well
2 POWER_ERR Power test error
3 OVER_RANGE_ERR Raw data over range
4 PARITY_ERR Raw data parity check error
5 APP_ROM_ERR Application firmware ROM check sum error
6 FPGA_CFG_ERR FPGA configuration error
7 CNV_TEMP_EXCEED_ERR Converter board temperature over range
8 BT_OBS_WARN Qcal channel obstructed
9 CNV_HDW_ERR Converter board hardware error
10 TRIG_JITTER_ERR Trig frequency out of spec
DCP did not receive configuration command
11 TG_COMM_ERR
from system
12 CAN_BUS_ERR Initial/reset/register check
13 BOOTER_ROM_ERR Check sum of the bootloader ROM error
14 RAM_ERR GDCP SRAM error
15 FPGA_ROM_ERR FPGA firmware ROM error
16 CNV_ROM_ERR Converter board firmware ROM error
3-4 SWITCH / JUMPER

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 4 - X-RAY GENERATOR
4-1 KV MEASURE BOARD
4-1-1 Illustration
CAUTION This board forms part of the oil seal of the High Voltage Tank. It can only be
removed at the factory. The Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) is the complete HV Tank.

LF
C
SF
SWITCH / JUMPER 4-1

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-1-2 Switches and Jumpers

None.
4-1-3 Fuses
None.
4-2 SWITCH / JUMPER

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-2 FILAMENT BOARD 1 INV
4-2-1 Illustration
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL INDICATOR DS3 GOES

DANGER
OUT.
DC
160v LF Common
SF

DS3 - Green - +160v
DC present
160v DS4 - Yellow - Inverter

DC Output Running
0
SF_LF - Yellow - Small ON - Yellow - Invert

Focus / Large Focus er Command ON
Relay Feedback
RST - Red - Board being
reset or powered up
DS2 - Yellow - Status

LED
DS1 - Yellow - Status

LED
SWITCH / JUMPER 4-3

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

None.
4-2-3 Fuses
None.
4-4 SWITCH / JUMPER

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-3 ROTATION BOARD HIGH SPEED
4-3-1 Illustration
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENE RATOR UNTIL INDICATOR DS6 AND
DANGER
DS7 (NEON-ORANGE) GO OUT.
Auxiliary
DC bus Common
Main

DS6
DC bus
SWITCH / JUMPER 4-5

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

None.
4-3-3 Fuses
None.
4-3-4 J2 Wiring
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
16
115V
sense
Fan, 115v AC
Line input
Fan, 115V AC
Line output X-ray tube
Thermal safety
4-6 SWITCH / JUMPER

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-4 LV POWER SUPPLY 3 PH BOARD
4-4-1 Illustration
HIGH VOLTAGE AND HOT SURFACE: DO NOT TOUCH BOARD UNTIL INDICATOR
DANGER
NE1 (NEON - ORANGE) GOES OUT.
SWITCH / JUMPER 4-7

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

None.
4-4-3 Fuses
None.
NE1 - Orange - indicates presence of DC Bus

+ 400
DC bus
- 400
160V
DC
0
DS2 - Green - 160 VDC
DS1 - Red - Mains Drop
4-8 SWITCH / JUMPER

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-5 GATE COMMAND BOARD
4-5-1 Illustration
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT TOUCH BOARD UNTIL DS300 ON THIS BOARD and DS1
DANGER
on Dual Snub board are out.
CAUTION
Hot surface on transformer T300 and heat sink.
DS300

DC bus DS300 - Neon (Orange) -
Presence of voltage on DC
bus for Flyback Converter to
create power supplies for
both Gate Commands
DS200 - Yellow - High

IGBT* (Q200) Gate Com
DS200
mand running
DS201 - Green - Presence

DS201
DS202
of +20 V Supply on high

IGBT* Gate Command DS202 - Green - Pres
ence of -10 V Supply on
high IGBT* Gate Com
mand
Inverter
current ILP
feedback
ILR
DS100 -Yellow-Low IGBT*

(Q100) Gate Command run
DS100
ning
DS102
DS101
DS101 - Green - Presence of DS102 - Green - Pres

+20 V Supply on low IGBT* ence of -10 V Supply on
Gate Command low IGBT* Gate Command
* Insulated Gate
Bipolar Transistor
SWITCH / JUMPER 4-9

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

None.
4-5-3 Fuse
None.

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-6 DUAL SNUB BOARD
4-6-1 Illustration
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL INDICATOR DS1 (NEON -

DANGER
ORANGE) GOES OUT.
DS1 - Neon (Orange) - Indicates presence of voltage on DC Bus

None.
4-6-3 Fuses
None.
SWITCH / JUMPER 4-11

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-7 IF BOARD NP
Service
Laptop
System I/F
System I/F

None.
4-7-2 Fuses
None.

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-8 KV CONTROL BOARD
4-8-1 Illustration

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-8-2 4Switches and Jumpers
Switch OR Jumper Function

RST reset push button
4-8-3 Fuses
None.
4-8-4 Non Volatile RAM
Reference Designation
U32 Non Volatile Parameters RAM (battery included)

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
4-9 AC/DC THREE PHASE BOARD
4-9-1 Illustration
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL DS1 (NEON - ORAN GE)
DANGER
GOES OUT.
CAUTION
Some components on this board can become very hot.
DC Bus to inverter DC Bus out

F1 - Fuse -
DS1 - Neon Protects (on DC Bus):
(Orange) - Indi LV Power Supply 3 Phase Board
cates presence Rotor Board High Speed
of voltage on the Gate Command Board
DC Bus. Type: 15 A, 600 VDC

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN

None.
4-9-3 Fuses
Fuse Protects Type

F1 On dc bus for:  15A, 600 V dc
LV Power Supply 3 Phase Board
rotor board High Speed
gate command board

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
REV 4 5306509-1EN
SECTION 5 - PDU (POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT)
5-1 RMT CNT
Illustration 5-1 RMT CNT
JP1 K5 K7
SECTION 5 - PDU (POWER

DISTRIBUTION UNIT
K19 K6
JP2 K9 K24
• JP1, JP2 - Set a jumper plug according to the following table. This table describes that the JP2 jumper
on the TGP board equipped on the gantry may also be changed.
Refer to Section 2-1, TGP.
Part No. of RMT CNT Jumper Setting

Part No. of TGP:
5310990
2301670 JP2 on TGP:
Set a plug across pins 2-3 (DETECT)
JP1, JP2 on RMT CNT:
Set a plug across pins 1-2.
SWITCH / JUMPER 5-1

Brivo CT315
Brivo CT325
5-2 SWITCH / JUMPER

www.gehealthcare.com
Imagination at work

BRIVO CT315/325 Functional Check / Adjustment: GE Healthcare

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BRIVO CT315/325 Functional Check / Adjustment: GE Healthcare

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Healthcare

• THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

ATTENTION • Ce manuel de service n'est disponible qu'en anglais.

ATENÇÃO • Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

ОСТОРОЖНО! • Данное руководство по обслуживанию предлагается только на

ATENCION • Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.

DIKKAT • Bu servis kilavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTIONARY STATEMENTS

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

System Updated power frequency to 50/602%Hz. (Sec. 1)

OC Updated commands for initializing DVD media. (Sec. 1)

Gantry Updated Illustration for DAS PS DC Output. (Sec. 1)

DAS Updated Illustration for DAS PS DC Output. (Sec. 2)

1 08/06/2009 Initial release.

SECTION 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

SECTION 2 - TORQUE VALUE FOR SCREW TIGHTENING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

SECTION 3 - COMMON PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

BEFORE USING THIS MANUAL

Use of This Manual

1-1 GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION/NOTICE

1-1-2 Operator Console

1-2 TORQUE CONVERSION TABLES

1-2-1[Conversion: kgf•cm -> N•m]

1 kgf•cm = 0.098 N•m

Coversion: kgf•cm -> N•m

0 0 0.0981 0.1961 0.2942 0.3923 0.4903 0.5884 0.6865 0.7845 0.8826

1-2 TORQUE CONVERSION TABLES (CONTINUED)

1-2-2[Conversion: N•m -> kgf•cm]

1 N•m = 10.2 kgf•cm

Conversion: N•m -> kgf•cm

1-2 TORQUE CONVERSION TABLES (CONTINUED)

1-2-3[Conversion: N•m -> lbf•ft]

Conversion: N•m -> lbf•ft

0 0 0.737 1.474 2.211 2.948 3.685 4.422 5.159 5.896 6.633

SECTION 2 - TORQUE VALUE FOR SCREW TIGHTENING

SECTION 2 - TORQUE VALUE FOR

Table 2-1 Stud Bolt (Steel) with Locktite

Screw Size Torque [kg-cm] (Unless otherwise specified)

2-1 NORMAL SCREWS

Table 2-2 Pan Head Screw

Screw Size Torque [kg-cm] (Unless otherwise specified)

Brass Steel (4.8) Stainless

If screw and nut

M 1.2 0.32 0.34 0.42

M 1.4 0.49 0.52 0.65

M 1.7 0.90 0.96 1.2

M2 1.5 1.6 1.9

M 2.2 1.9 2.0 2.5

M 2.3 2.3 2.5 3.1

M 2.5 3.0 3.2 4.0

M 2.6 3.4 3.6 4.5

M3 5.3 5.7 7.1

M 3.5 8.2 8.7 11

M 4.5 17.5 19 23.5

M8 101 108 135

SECTION 3 - COMMON PROCEDURES

3-1 HOW TO REMOVE GANTRY COVERS

3-1-1 Gantry Side Cover Removal

Illustration 3-1 Side Cover Removal

SECTION 3 - COMMON PROCEDURES

Service Window Cover